US20100048287A1 - Slot Machine - Google Patents

Slot Machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20100048287A1
US20100048287A1 US12/540,787 US54078709A US2010048287A1 US 20100048287 A1 US20100048287 A1 US 20100048287A1 US 54078709 A US54078709 A US 54078709A US 2010048287 A1 US2010048287 A1 US 2010048287A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
game
symbol
display
symbols
symbol display
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/540,787
Inventor
Kazumasa Yoshizawa
Yuya Konno
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Universal Entertainment Corp
Original Assignee
Aruze Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Aruze Corp filed Critical Aruze Corp
Priority to US12/540,787 priority Critical patent/US20100048287A1/en
Assigned to ARUZE CORP. reassignment ARUZE CORP. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KONNO, YUYA, YOSHIZAWA, KAZUMASA
Publication of US20100048287A1 publication Critical patent/US20100048287A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G07CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07FCOIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • G07F17/326Game play aspects of gaming systems
    • G07F17/3267Game outcomes which determine the course of the subsequent game, e.g. double or quits, free games, higher payouts, different new games

Definitions

  • the slot machine according to one more aspects of the disclosure relates to a slot machine that executes a free game, in addition to a base game, when a predetermined condition has been satisfied during the base game.
  • a game is started by inserting coins, or the like, in the gaming machine.
  • a symbol columns is variably displayed in a predetermined area in the gaming machine, and after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the symbol string is stopped and displayed. Then a payout is awarded based on a combination of the symbols thus stopped.
  • a winning combination for which a payout is awarded is established is determined depending on whether a predetermined number of the same kind of symbols (for instance, “CHERRY” and “7”) are positioned along a pay line set in advance. Conventionally, if a predetermined number or more of the same kind of symbols are positioned, a payout was also awarded based on the number of symbols thus positioned, irrespective of the pay line.
  • a predetermined number of the same kind of symbols for instance, “CHERRY” and “7”
  • a large number of conventional slot machines execute two kinds of games, including a base game and a free game.
  • the base game is executed by consumption of a gaming value (coins, credits, etc) corresponding to a bet amount.
  • the free game is executed without consumption of any gaming value corresponding to the bet amount.
  • Switching from the base game to the free game occurs if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the case that a specific symbol(s) is(are) stopped and displayed during the base game. Switching from the free game to the base game occurs if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the case that a free game has been carried out by a predetermined number of times.
  • the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved by making it easier to establish a combination for which payout is awarded in the free game in comparison with the case of the base game.
  • the object of the disclosure is to provide a slot machine capable of providing games contents of which are visually easy to understand and attractive enough for the player who expects winning large-amount prize by executing a next game with specific symbol(s) being placed in a hold state at specific symbol display area(s), in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s).
  • a slot machine comprising a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor.
  • the processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas.
  • the processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game.
  • the processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game.
  • the processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state.
  • the processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
  • a slot machine comprising a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor.
  • the processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas.
  • the processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game.
  • the processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game.
  • the processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state.
  • the processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
  • a slot machine comprising a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor.
  • the processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas.
  • the processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game.
  • the processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas every game or every plurality of games in a free game.
  • the processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state.
  • the processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
  • FIG. 1 is a view showing a characteristic part of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a front view showing a symbol display portion of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 4 shows an example of a symbol column positioned in reel during a base game and a free game of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 5 is a chart showing relation of variety of symbols and payouts which are used in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the entirety of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub control board installed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view explaining about the base game and the free game executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main control process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main game process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a free-game process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the another embodiment;
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 14 is an external perspective view of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing reel display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing symbol display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an internal constitution of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an internal constitution of the sub-control board of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a symbol displayed on a reel of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory view showing a symbol row displayed on the reel of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a state that the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 22 is an explanatory view showing a state that symbols are stopped on the symbol display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing content of a payout table of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a first main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a first main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 27 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing one example of a symbol combination table in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a state that additional payout amount is displayed on a background portion of a main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of an object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a state that a middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing a state that a large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a second main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a second main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view showing a state that an additional number of games is displayed on a background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing a state that the small size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 60 is an explanatory view showing a state that the middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state that the large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing one example of display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 65 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 68 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a third main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 71 is a flowchart of a third main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 74 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing a state that an additional payout amount is displayed on the background portion of a main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 77 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing another example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing a state that the small size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a state that the middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing a state that the large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 87 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 88 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 89 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 91 is a view showing an external appearance of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment
  • FIG. 92 is a block diagram schematically showing a control system of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 93 is a view showing an external appearance of the slot machine in a condition where a front door of the slot machine is opened in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing an internal configuration of a light emitting device in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing an internal configuration of the light emitting device and a cabinet in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from LED is transmitted to a decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 97 is a view showing an external appearance of the slot machine in a condition where a front door of the slot machine is opened in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment.
  • a slot machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings based on an embodiment embodying one or more aspects of the disclosure.
  • one or more aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in distributable (via CD and the like) or downloadable software games, console games, and the like.
  • the slot machine may be a virtual slot machine that is displayed on a multi-purpose computer and/or dedicated kiosk.
  • aspects of the disclosure are described by way of hardware elements. However, it is appreciated that these elements may also be software modules that are executable in a computer.
  • the software modules may be stored on a computer readable medium, including but not limited to a USB drive, CD, DVD, computer-readable memory, tape, diskette, floppy disk, and the like.
  • aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in a JAVA-based application or the like that runs in a processor or processors.
  • the terms “CPU”, “processor”, and “controller” are inclusive by nature, including at least one of hardware, software, or firmware. These terms may include a portion of a processing unit in a computer (for instance, in multiple core processing units), multiple cores, a functional processor (as running virtually on at least one of processor or server, which may be local or remote).
  • the processor may include only a local processor, only a remote server, or a combination of a local processor and a remote server.
  • one or more aspects of the disclosure may be implemented as computer executable instructions on a computer readable medium such as a non-volatile memory, a magnetic or optical disc. Further, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be implemented with a carrier signal in the form of, for instance, an audio-frequency, radio-frequency, or optical carrier wave.
  • the slot machine according to the first embodiment to be described hereinafter is a so-called video slot machine which has an image display device such as a liquid crystal display and in which a game is executed by displaying various kinds of symbol image on the image display device.
  • the slot machine executes two types of games: a base game which is executed with consuming a gaming value corresponding to the bet amount placed by a player; and a free game (bonus game) which is executed without consuming a gaming value. Also in a free game, from among a plurality of symbol display areas, symbol display area(s) at specific location(s) is/are previously designated as specific symbol display areas. As shown in FIG. 1 , in case a wild symbol 11 is repositioned in a designated specific symbol display area, the wild symbol repositioned in the specific symbol display area will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • symbols will be repositioned in symbol display areas other than the one(s) in which the wild symbol(s) has/have been placed in a hold state. Furthermore, location(s) and the number of symbol display areas designated as specific symbol display area(s) varies in each game which constitutes the free game.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the slot machine 1 is an upright-type slot machine installed in a gaming arcade such as a casino or the like.
  • This slot machine 1 has a cabinet 2 , a main door 3 provided at a front face of the cabinet 2 , and a topper effect device 4 arranged at an upper side of the cabinet 2 .
  • the cabinet 2 is a housing portion that houses electrical or mechanical components. These electrical or mechanical components are used in execution of a predetermined game aspect.
  • the main door 3 has an upper display portion 10 A, a mid-stage variable display portion 10 B and a lower display portion 10 C, functioning as a display portion 10 that displays information with respect to the game.
  • the upper display portion 10 A has an upper liquid crystal panel 11 A which is arranged at an upper side of the variable display portion 10 B.
  • the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A displays, for instance, effect images, an introduction to the game contents, explanation of game rules, payout tables, a sub game result to be later described and the like.
  • the lower display portion 10 C is arranged at a lower side of the variable display portion 10 B and has a plastic panel 11 C onto which an image has been printed. This plastic panel 11 C is lit up with a backlight.
  • the variable display portion 10 B that displays an execution state of the game has a main liquid crystal panel 11 B constituted of a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel which is fixedly mounted to the main door 3 .
  • the main liquid crystal panel 11 B is constituted of a heretofore known liquid crystal panel and has a symbol display portion 12 which comprises a 3 ⁇ 5 matrix of symbol display areas.
  • the symbol display portion 12 is constituted of five reels 13 through 17 . With respect to the respective reels 13 through 17 , the symbol columns with the alignment set in advance ( FIG. 4 ) are displayed in a scrolled manner during a base game and a free game, and after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, three symbols are respectively stopped and displayed in each reel.
  • fifteen symbols are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game as will be described later, and a predetermined payout is awarded to the player in accordance with the combination of the displayed symbols and the credit amount (bet amount) thus betted.
  • the number of reels may be three, and further, the number of displayed symbols is not limited to fifteen.
  • frame(s) 101 is(are) indicated at symbol display area(s) designated as specific symbol display area(s) in the 3 ⁇ 5 symbol display areas (see FIG. 1 ).
  • a touch panel 18 is provided at a front face of the main liquid crystal panel 11 B. The player can operate the touch panel 18 to input various types of commands.
  • the payout amount display portion 19 displays, as a payout amount, a payout amount to be awarded in a case where the symbol combination which is stopped and displayed on the pay line in a base game is a predetermined combination, and an accumulated payout amount acquired in a free game.
  • the credit amount display portion 20 displays the credit amount that the player currently possesses.
  • the cabinet 2 has an operation table 25 provided at a front face thereof, between the variable display portion 10 B and the lower display portion 10 C, and bulging out at the front side.
  • On this operation table 25 are arranged various kinds of operation buttons 26 , forming an operation unit that commands execution of the game.
  • the buttons 26 include a BET button, a COLLECT button, a START button, a CASHOUT button and the like.
  • the operation table 25 has a coin slot 27 adapted to accept coins, representing gaming values, inside the cabinet 2 , and a bill slot 28 adapted to accept bills inside the cabinet 2 .
  • the slot machine 1 employs coins, bills or electronic value information (credit) corresponding to these, as gaming values.
  • the gaming values applicable to the disclosure are not limited to those described above, and can include, for instance, medals, tokens, electronic money and tickets.
  • a coin tray 29 adapted to accept coins paid out from the hopper.
  • a light emitting portion 30 which lights up in a predetermined lighting fashion during a free game, or if a win occurs.
  • a speaker 31 for audio output.
  • the slot machine 1 has a topper effect device 4 provided at an upper side of the cabinet 2 .
  • This topper effect device 4 has a rectangular board shape and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel with the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A of the upper display portion 11 A.
  • FIG. 3 is a front view showing a symbol display portion 12 in a slot machine according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 shows a symbol column arranged on each reel in a slot machine according to the first embodiment of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a view showing a list of contents for various symbols and payouts which are used during a game and free game in a slot machine according to the first embodiment of the disclosure.
  • the symbol display area 12 in the base game is constituted of five reels 13 through 17 .
  • the reels 13 through 17 have symbol display areas 32 through 46 , each symbol display area respectively displaying three symbols when the respective rotating reels 13 through 17 are stopped.
  • one kind of wild symbol 111 and six kinds of scatter symbols namely, “SUN” symbol 112 , “THUNDER” symbol 113 , “A” symbol 114 , “K” symbol 115 , “Q” symbol 116 and “J” symbol 117 ).
  • the respective symbol display areas 32 through 46 each display one symbol (total fifteen symbols), as shown in FIG. 8 .
  • a dotted line is drawn to divide the respective symbol display areas 32 through 46 , however, a configuration is possible where the dotted line is not shown.
  • each of the reels 13 through 17 is comprised of wild symbol(s) 111 , “SUN” symbol(s) 112 , “THUNDER” symbol(s) 113 , “A” symbol(s) 114 , “K” symbol(s) 115 , “Q” symbol(s) 116 , and “J” symbol(s) 117 , wherein those symbols are arranged in a predetermined order.
  • FIG. 4 partially illustrates the symbol column of the reel 13 .
  • Other reels 14 through 17 also have symbol columns such like the symbol column of the reel 13 .
  • a code number is assigned to each of the symbols in order from top one and code numbers are used in a lottery process so as to determine symbols to be position in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • a wild symbol 111 is substituted for any one of all the symbols if it is positioned in any one of the symbol display areas 38 through 46 . If three wild symbols 111 are positioned in any three of the symbol display areas 38 through 46 , 50 credits are paid as payout. If four wild symbols 111 are positioned in any four of the symbol display areas 38 through 46 , 200 credits are paid as payout. If five wild symbols 111 are positioned in any five of the symbol display areas 38 through 46 , 1000 credits are paid as payout. Additionally, if three or more of wild symbols 111 are positioned in any of the symbol display areas 38 through 46 , free games will be executed the predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) as payout.
  • the payout table shown in FIG. 5 indicates payouts in case the bet amount placed at the beginning of a game is one. Therefore, in case the bet amount is two or more, there is paid out amount corresponding to the product of a payout multiplied by the bet amount.
  • only scatter symbols may constitute symbols and a winning combination may be established if the predetermined number or more of same kind of symbols are in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 irrespective of the pay line.
  • a payout is awarded.
  • a payout may also be awarded for a win according to a pay line.
  • a payout may be awarded if the predetermined number or more of same kind of symbols are displayed along the pay line. Also, both a payout depending on the pay line and a payout irrespective of the pay line may be awarded.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the entire slot machine 1 .
  • the slot machine 1 has a plurality of constituent elements arranged around a main control board 71 including a controller 51 that executes control programs that will be described later ( FIG. 9 through FIG. 11 ).
  • the main control board 71 has a controller 51 , a random number generation circuit 55 , a sampling circuit 56 , a clock pulse generation circuit 57 , a divider 58 , an illumination effect driving circuit 61 , a hopper driving circuit 63 , a payout completion signal circuit 65 and a display portion driving circuit 67 .
  • the controller 51 has a main CPU 52 , a RAM 53 and a ROM 54 .
  • the main CPU 52 operates in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM 54 and performs signal input and output with respect to the other constituent elements through an I/O port 59 .
  • the main CPU 53 controls the operation of the entire slot machine 1 .
  • the RAM 53 stores data and programs to be used when the main CPU 52 is operating. For instance, the RAM 53 temporarily retains the random number values which have been sampled by the sampling circuit 56 after the game has started.
  • the RAM 53 stores code numbers corresponding to the respective reels 13 through 17 .
  • the ROM 54 stores various types of programs that will be executed by the main CPU 52 , as well as permanent data.
  • the programs stored in the ROM 54 include game programs and game system programs (hereinafter referred to as game programs or the like). Further, the game programs include lottery programs as will be described later.
  • This first lottery program includes symbol weighing data for each of the respective five reels 13 through 17 .
  • the symbol weighing data shows correspondence relationship between the respective code numbers and one or a plurality of random number values within a predetermined number value range (for instance, 0 through 255).
  • the probability of lottery with respect to each symbol is set by associating one or a plurality of random number values to one code number.
  • the random number values are drawn by lottery and symbol which have been finally identified from the random number values are repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • the first lottery program for determining the symbols to be positioned may also employ weighing data in which the predetermined random number range is associated with the symbol combination.
  • the symbol combination is selected by lottery based on the lottery program, and thereafter, the symbol combination thus determined is repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • This second lottery program includes data (table) concerning relationship between each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 and one or a plurality of random number values within a predetermined number value range (for instance, 0 through 255). The random number values are drawn by lottery and one or more symbol display areas to be designated as specific symbol display are(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • the random number generation circuit 55 operates in accordance with the commands from the main CPU 52 and generates random numbers within a predetermined range.
  • the sampling circuit 56 selects, by lottery, an arbitrary random number from the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 55 in response to a command from the main CPU 52 .
  • the sampling circuit 56 inputs the random number thus selected to the main CPU 52 .
  • the clock pulse generation circuit 57 generates a reference clock for causing the main CPU 52 to operate.
  • the divider 58 inputs a signal obtained by dividing the reference clock by a constant frequency to the main CPU 52 .
  • the main control board 71 is connected to the touch panel 18 .
  • the touch panel 18 is arranged at a front face of the main liquid crystal panel 11 B and is adapted to identify a coordinate position of the portion that was touched by the player. Specifically, the touch panel 18 can discriminate the portion that the player has touched, and in what direction the touched portion was moved based on the coordinate position information that was thus identified. A signal in accordance with the above discrimination is then inputted to the main CPU 52 through the I/O port 59 .
  • the main control board 71 is connected to the operation buttons 26 , including a START button for commanding execution of a game, a COLLECT button, a BET button and the like. Accordingly, a signal in accordance with a depression operation of these buttons is inputted to the main CPU 52 through the I/O port 59 .
  • the illumination effect driving circuit 61 outputs an effect signal for causing the light emitting portion 30 and the topper effect device 4 as mentioned above to perform illumination effects.
  • the topper effect device 4 is connected in series with the illumination effect driving circuit 61 through the light emitting portion 30 .
  • the hopper driving circuit 63 drives the hopper 64 under the control of the main CPU 52 . As a result, the hopper 64 carries out an operation to payout coins to the coin tray 29 .
  • the payout completion signal circuit 65 receives coin amount value data from the coin detecting portion 66 to which it is connected. Then, when the received coin amount value has reached the set coin amount value, the payout completion signal circuit 65 inputs a signal that notifies the completion of coin payout to the main CPU 52 .
  • the coin detecting portion 66 detects the number of coins that were paid out by the hopper 64 and then inputs coin amount value data showing the amount of coins that was detected to the payout completion signal circuit 65 .
  • the display portion driving circuit 67 controls the display operation of the respective display portions including the reels 13 through 17 , a payout amount display portion 19 and the credit amount display portion 20 and the like.
  • the main control board 71 is connected to the sub-control board 72 .
  • the sub-control board 72 carries out display control of the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A in the upper display portion 10 A and the main liquid crystal panel 11 B in the variable display portion 10 B, as well as output control of the audio outputted by the speaker 31 , based on the commands received from the main control board 71 .
  • This sub-control board 72 is constituted on a separate circuit board from the circuit board that constitutes the main control board 71 .
  • the sub-control board 72 has a micro computer (hereinafter referred to as “sub-micro computer”) 73 which is provided as a main constituting element.
  • the sub-control board 72 has a sound source IC 78 , a power amplifier 79 , and an image control circuit 81 .
  • the sub-micro computer 73 has a sub-CPU 74 , a program ROM 75 , a work RAM 76 and I/O ports 77 and 80 .
  • the sub-control board 72 does not have a clock pulse generation circuit, a divider, a random number generation circuit and a sampling circuit, it is constituted so as to execute sampling of random numbers based on an operation program of the sub-CPU 74 .
  • the program ROM 75 stores a control program to be executed by the sub-CPU 74 .
  • the work RAM 76 is constituted as a temporary memory to be used by the sub CPU 74 in executing the control program.
  • the image control circuit 81 has an image control CPU 82 , an image control work RAM 83 , an image control program ROM 84 , an image ROM 86 , a video RAM 87 and an image control IC 88 .
  • the image control CPU 82 determines the image to be displayed on the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A and the main liquid crystal panel 11 B based on the parameters set in the sub-micro computer 73 and the image control programs stored in the image control program ROM 84 . For instance, the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A displays a payout table and a help screen.
  • the main liquid crystal panel 11 B carries out scrolled display and stopped display of the respective symbols 111 through 117 concurrent with the rotation of the reels 13 through 17 in a base game and free game, with respect to the symbol display portion 12 .
  • the image control program ROM 84 stores an image control program and various types of selection tables relating to display on the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A and the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • the image control work RAM 83 functions as a temporary memory to be used in execution of the image control program in the image control CPU 82 .
  • the image control IC 88 forms an image in accordance with the contents determined by the image control CPU 82 and then outputs the image thus formed to the upper liquid crystal panel 11 A and the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • the image ROM 86 stores dot data for forming an image.
  • the video RAM 87 functions as a temporary memory to be used by the image control IC 88 in forming an image.
  • the base game is a slot game in which a predetermined symbol combination is repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B, through the respective reels 13 through 17 . More specifically, the player operates the operation button 26 to set the bet amount, and when he/she depresses the START button, a lottery process is executed to select, by lottery, the symbols that will be positioned in the symbol display portion 12 .
  • the symbol columns are displayed in a scrolled manner (refer to the upper one in FIG. 8 ).
  • the respective symbols 21 through 24 are displayed in an alignment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • a total of fifteen symbols will be sequentially stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 , as shown at the lower one in FIG. 8 .
  • various kinds of winning combinations are determined in advance based on the respective symbol combination repositioned in the main liquid crystal panel 11 B (see FIG. 5 ). If a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is realized through the symbols repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 , a gaming value obtained by multiplying the payout corresponding to the winning combination thus established by the bet amount is awarded to the player.
  • the free game carried out in the slot machine executed after the game mode has switched from the base game in a case where a winning combination including three or more of wild symbols 111 has been positioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • the free game terminates and the game mode switches again to the base game.
  • the free game is the same as the base game, except that in the free game, gaming values (credits) corresponding to the bet amount are not consumed at the start of the game, and the game is continuously carried out automatically without requiring the player to operate the operation button 26 .
  • the wild symbol(s) repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • a lottery process is executed by using random number values so as to randomly select a predetermined number of specific symbol display are(s) from among the symbol display areas 36 through 46 .
  • each of the reels 13 through 17 starts rotating and each of their symbol columns is displayed in a scrolled manner. While the symbol columns are being scrolled, frames 101 corresponding to the predetermined number of specific symbol display areas randomly selected through the lottery are displayed on the symbol display portion 12 .
  • the uppermost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that five symbol display areas 33 , 35 , 39 , 43 and 45 are selected as specific symbol display areas.
  • the reels 13 through 17 sequentially stop rotating in turn, starting from the left, so as to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • a payout associated with the realized winning combination is awarded to the player.
  • the reels 13 through 17 stop rotating to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 and wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned within frame(s) 101 (i.e., specific symbol display area), the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • the second-uppermost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that two wild symbols 111 are repositioned in the symbol display areas 33 and 45 which are specific symbol display areas. Accordingly, in the subsequent free game(s), the two wild symbols 111 will remain positioned in the symbol display areas 33 and 45 until remaining free games terminate.
  • a lottery process is executed again by using random number values to randomly select specific symbol display area(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • each of the reels 13 through 17 starts rotating and each of their symbol columns is displayed in a scrolled manner.
  • the wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state will not be changed.
  • the second-bottommost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that symbol columns are being displayed in a scrolled manner in each of the symbol display areas other than the symbol display areas 33 and 45 in which the wild symbols 111 have been placed in a hold state.
  • the frames 101 indicating specific symbol display areas randomly selected though the lottery are displayed on the symbol display portion 12 .
  • the example at the second-bottommost in FIG. 1 shows that six symbol display areas 36 , 37 , 39 , 40 , 42 and 43 are selected as specific symbol display areas.
  • the reels 13 through 17 sequentially stop rotating in turn, starting from the left, so as to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas other than the ones where the wild symbols 111 have been displayed. For instance, in case of the bottommost in FIG. 1 , symbols are repositioned in symbol display areas other than the symbol display areas 33 and 45 . If a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is realized through the symbols repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 , a payout corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.
  • wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned within frame(s) 101 , the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • the bottommost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that a wild symbol 111 is repositioned in the symbol display area 37 which is a specific symbol display area. Accordingly, in the subsequent free game(s), the three wild symbols 111 will remain repositioned in the symbol display areas 33 , 37 and 45 until remaining free games terminate.
  • the number of wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state may increase gradually, whereby player's expectancy to win a high payout is enhanced.
  • FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a main control program.
  • the main control board 71 activates the sub-control board 72 and the controller 51 executes an initial setting process at step (hereinafter abbreviated as S) 1 .
  • the main CPU 52 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 54 and expands the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS in the RAM 53 .
  • the main CPU 52 carries out a diagnosis and initialization of the different types of peripheral devices.
  • the main CPU 52 writes the game programs and the like from the ROM 54 into the RAM 53 to acquire payout rate setting data and country identification information. While executing the initial setting process, the main CPU 52 also carries out an authentication process with respect to each program.
  • the main CPU 52 sequentially reads the game programs and the like from the RAM 53 and executes these programs to carry out a main game process.
  • the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment carries out the game by executing this main game process.
  • the main game process is repeatedly executed while power is supplied to the slot machine 1 .
  • FIG. 10 is a flow chart of a main game process program to be executed in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the programs shown in the flow charts at FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 as will be described later are stored in the ROM 54 and RAM 53 provided in the slot machine 1 and are executed in the main CPU 52 .
  • the main CPU 52 first executes a start acceptance process at S 11 .
  • the player inserts coins and places a bet using the BET button from amongst the operation buttons 26 .
  • the main CPU 52 determines whether or not the start button from amongst the operation buttons 26 has been depressed. This determination is carried out based on the signal inputted to the main CPU 52 in response to depression of the start button.
  • the flow returns to the start acceptance process (S 11 ).
  • the player can carry out an operation to correct, etc. the bet amount.
  • the main CPU 52 subtracts the bet amount set based on the above-described bet operation from the credit amount that the player currently possesses and at the same time stores the result as bet information in the RAM 53 .
  • the main CPU 52 executes a symbol lottery process for the base game.
  • the main CPU 52 selects, by lottery, the symbols to be positioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B. More specifically, the main CPU 52 executes the first lottery program stored in the RAM 53 , thereby sampling a random number value from a number value range within a predetermined random number value range.
  • the main CPU 52 determines the respective fifteen symbols (specifically, stop position of reels 13 through 17 ), from among the wild symbols 111 and the six kinds of scatter symbols 112 through 117 , that will be repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 , based on the sampled random number value and the symbol weighing data.
  • the main CPU 52 carries out a reel rotation process. Namely, the reels 13 through 17 start rotating and the symbol columns positioned in the respective reels 13 through 17 are displayed in a scrolled manner at a predetermined speed. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the rotating reels 13 through 17 are stopped in turn, starting from the left, and one symbol is respectively displayed in each of symbol display areas 32 through 46 (refer to FIG. 8 ). Thus, the symbol combination determined at the above-mentioned S 13 is repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 of the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • the main CPU 52 carries out a winning determination process to determine whether the symbol combination positioned in the main liquid crystal panel 11 B is any of the winning combinations for which a payout is awarded. This determination is carried out based on the code numbers of the respective reels 13 through 17 stored in the RAM 53 .
  • the main CPU 52 calculates a payout based on the winning combination thus established. For instance, if a predetermined number or more of the same kind of symbols have been positioned, as shown in FIG. 5 , a payout is calculated in accordance with the kind of symbol and the number of positioned symbols.
  • the main CPU 52 notifies the player by displaying the kind of the winning combination thus established and the contents of the payout with respect to the main liquid crystal panel 11 B. For instance, if three wild symbols 111 and three “A” symbols 114 have been indicated, a message “WIN 53” and a message “Go Free Game” are displayed, as shown in FIG. 8 . The former message notifies that 53 credits will be paid out as a payout, and the latter message notifies that the game mode shifts to a free game.
  • the main CPU 52 determines whether or not the trigger for shifting to the free game has been established. More specifically, if the winning combination including three wild symbols 111 has been established, a determination is made that the trigger for shifting to the free game has been established.
  • the main CPU 52 awards a payout to the player in accordance with the winning combination established in the current game, based on the calculation result of the above-described S 17 .
  • the payout can be made using coins corresponding to the credit amount (1 credit corresponds to 1 coin), and the payout can be made by using bar-code attached tickets, in response to the depression of the CASHOUT button from among the operation buttons 26 . If a free game has been carried out, a payout which was accumulated during the free game is paid out altogether to the player.
  • FIG. 11 is a flow chart of a sub-process program for the free game process in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the main CPU 52 designates specific symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • the main CPU 52 first executes the second lottery program stored in the RAM 53 for sampling random number values from the predetermined number value range.
  • the main CPU 52 randomly selects a predetermined number of symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 as specific symbol display areas based on the sampled random number values and a not-shown table. Then, the CPU 52 designate the selected symbol display areas as specific symbol display areas.
  • the main CPU 52 executes a symbol lottery process for the free game in which a symbol to be positioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B is selected by lottery.
  • the substantial processing method of the lottery process is similar to the symbol lottery process for the base game at the above S 13 , therefore a detailed description is omitted.
  • the main CPU 52 carries out a reel rotation process. Specifically, the reels 13 through 17 start rotating and the respective symbol columns positioned in the respective reels 13 through 17 are displayed in a scrolled manner at a predetermined speed.
  • the main CPU 52 displays frames 101 (refer to FIG. 1 ) on the symbol display portion 12 so as to specify specific symbol display areas designated at S 1 .
  • the main CPU 52 stops rotation of the reels 13 through 17 in turn, starting from the left, and then displays a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 , after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.
  • the symbol combination determined at the above-mentioned S 32 is displayed on the symbol display areas 32 through 46 of the liquid crystal panel 11 B in a matrix.
  • the CPU 52 repositions symbols in symbol display areas other than the one(s) where the wild symbol(s) 11 is(are) placed in a hold state.
  • the main CPU 52 carries out a winning determination process in which a determination is made whether or not the symbol combination repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B is any of the winning combinations for which any of the payout is awarded.
  • the main CPU 52 determines whether or not a symbol combination including the wild symbol(s) 111 establishes any of the winning combinations for which any of the payout is awarded.
  • the main CPU 52 calculates the payout based on the winning combination thus established. For instance, if predetermined number of more of the same kind of symbols have been positioned, as shown in FIG. 5 , a payout is calculated in accordance with the kind symbol and the number of positioned symbols. In case there is(are) wild symbol(s) 111 placed in a hold state in symbol display area(s), the main CPU calculates a payout based on a symbol combination including the wild symbol(s) 111 placed in a hold state in the symbol display area(s).
  • the main CPU 52 sends a notification to the player by displaying the kind of the established winning combination and the contents of the payout on the main liquid crystal panel 11 B.
  • the main CPU 52 accumulatively stores a payout corresponding to the winning combination established in the current game in the RAM 53 , based on the calculation results at the above-described S 38 .
  • the payout thus stored is awarded to the player altogether, after the free game ends (S 22 ).
  • the main CPU 52 stops rotation of the reels 13 through 17 to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 and determine judges whether or not wild symbol(s) 111 has(have) been positioned within frame(s) 101 (i.e., specific symbol display area(s)).
  • the main CPU 52 places and maintains the wild symbol(s) 111 positioned in the specific symbol display area(s) in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • the wild symbol(s) once place in a hold state will remain positioned in the specific symbol display area(s) until remaining free games terminate. continuously be placed.
  • the free game completion condition in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes five times of free-game execution after shifting to the free game.
  • the main CPU 52 cancels the hold state of the wild symbol(s) 111 placed as so at S 42 .
  • the flow shifts to S 22 .
  • a free-game shift trigger is established in a base game (S 19 :YES)
  • a free game is executed (S 21 ).
  • the main CPU 52 randomly designates a predetermined number of specific symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 (S 31 ).
  • the main CPU 52 displays frames 111 for specifying the predetermined number of specific symbol display areas thus designated on the symbol display portion 12 while symbol columns are being scrolled (S 34 ).
  • the reels 13 through 17 stop rotating to position a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 .
  • wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s)
  • the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific symbol display area(s) will placed and maintained in a hold state thereat in subsequent free game(s) (S 42 ).
  • symbols will be repositioned in symbol display areas other than one(s) in which the wild symbol(s) has/have been placed in a hold state (S 35 ).
  • the contents of games are made visually easy for the player to understand and the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved.
  • the number of wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state may increase gradually. Thereby, it makes it possible to provide a game which attracts the player who expects to win a high payout is enhanced.
  • the number of specific symbol display areas and locations thereof are randomly selected for each game through a lottery process. Therefore the game will not go monotonous and entertainment characteristics of the slot machine can be improved.
  • the conditions for shifting to the free game include establishment of a winning combination including a predetermined number of wild symbols 111 .
  • the conditions for shifting to the free game may also include other conditions. For instance, such condition may occur unexpectedly, like a mystery.
  • the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that, if wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s), the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in specific symbol display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • symbols other than the wild symbol 111 may be the symbol to be placed in a hold state. For instance, if a “SUN” symbol 112 or a “THUNDER” symbol 113 is repositioned in a specific symbol display area, the “SUN” symbol 112 or the “THUNDER” symbol 113 repositioned in the specific symbol display area may be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that the process to designate specific symbol display area(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 based on a lottery result (S 31 ) for each game which constitutes the free game.
  • S 31 may be executed for every certain number of games (e.g. every two games or every three games).
  • the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that the wild symbol 111 once placed in a hold state in a symbol display area will remain at the symbol display area until remaining free games terminate.
  • such wild symbol 111 may be maintained in a hold state only in a predetermined number of free games (e.g., two games).
  • the disclosure is not limited to video reels only, but is also applicable with respect to slot machines using mechanical reels.
  • the slot machine 201 shown in FIG. 12 is a so-called hybrid-type slot machine having a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel installed at a front face of the plurality of mechanical reels which are rotatably supported, and a game is carried out therein by displaying images of the respective symbols positioned on the outer periphery of the mechanical reels, through the transparent liquid crystal panel.
  • the slot machine 201 has three reels, namely, a left reel 203 , a center reel 204 and a right reel 205 which are rotatably supported.
  • the respective reels 203 through 205 have symbol columns drawn on their outer periphery, each symbol column being made up of a plurality of symbols.
  • the respective reels 203 through 205 have, at a front side thereof, a main liquid crystal panel 202 which is made up of a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel provided in the main door.
  • the main liquid crystal panel 202 has three display windows 206 , 207 , and 208 formed therein, the back faces thereof being visible.
  • the base game and the free game may be carried out employing the reels 203 through 205 . Furthermore, a frame for designating a specific symbol display area is displayed on the main liquid crystal panel 20 . Furthermore, in case a wild symbol 111 is repositioned in a specific symbol display area, the wild symbol 111 will be continuously displayed in the location corresponding to the specific symbol display area in which the wild symbol has been repositioned until remaining free game terminate.
  • aspects of the disclosure may be realized as a playing method for executing the above-described processes and may be realized in a form of a program for executing the playing method with a computer and a recording medium in which said program is recorded.
  • the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment includes image display devices such as the liquid crystal display and the like, the game is executed by displaying the images of various symbols on the image display device.
  • the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as a video slot machine.
  • the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as hybrid-type slot machine which is constructed from mechanical reels and a transparent liquid display device provided in front of the mechanic reels. Also, the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as a mechanical slot machine having mechanical reels.
  • additional payout amount is determined in a free game process (S 1041 ). Also, when the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1043 : YES), an outcome based on the game result of the free games will be provided to the player (S 1044 ). Thereafter, a symbol combination stopped on the symbol display portions is determined based on the determined payout amount (S 1045 ). After that, reels spin on reel display portions, and reels are stopped so that the combination of symbols becomes the determined symbol combination (S 1047 ). Then, an additional payout amount which has been determined is displayed (S 1048 ). And, the determined additional payout amount is paid out (S 1049 ).
  • FIG. 14 shows an external appearance of the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • the slot machine 1001 is an upright type slot machine which is provided in a game hall such as the casino.
  • a game hall such as the casino.
  • the exterior appearance of the slot machine 1001 shown in FIG. 14 is merely one example in the disclosure, and one or more aspects of the disclosure is not limited to the exterior appearance.
  • the slot machine 1001 includes a cabinet 1002 .
  • the cabinet 1002 is a housing portion which houses the electric and mechanic components for executing the predetermined gaming modes in the slot machine 1001 .
  • the slot machine 1001 includes an upper display 1010 A, a main display 1010 B and a lower display 1010 C at the front side of the cabinet 1002 to display various gaming information.
  • the upper display 1010 A is arranged on the upper portion of the cabinet 1002
  • the main display 1010 B is arranged on the middle portion of the cabinet 1002
  • the lower display 1010 C is arranged on the lower portion of the cabinet 1002 .
  • the upper display 1010 A is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. The effect images, the payout table in the game, the game rules and the like are displayed on the upper display 1010 A.
  • the main display 1010 B is constructed from the liquid crystal panel.
  • the main display 1010 B includes five columns of reel display portions 1101 to 1105 , as shown in FIG. 15 .
  • variable display and stop display of the symbol rows are executed.
  • Three symbols are displayed on each of the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 .
  • symbols are displayed in a 3 ⁇ 5 matrix shape on the main display 1010 B, as shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 include symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C and 1115 A to 1115 C.
  • the number of the reels and the number of the displayed symbols on respective reel display portions are variable.
  • the image effect is made on the main display 1010 B based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount in the free game, as will described later.
  • a touch panel 1018 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal panel on the main display 1010 B.
  • a player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 1018 .
  • a payout amount display portion 1005 and a credit number display portion 1006 are provided on the main display 1010 B.
  • the display positions of the payout amount display portion 1005 and the credit number display portion 1006 are arranged arbitrarily.
  • the payout amount display portion 1005 and the credit number display portion 1006 may be arranged on the right lower portion of the main display 1010 B.
  • a bet number display portion which displays the bet number may also be provided.
  • the payout amount (namely, the payout amount when a predetermined number of predetermined symbols are displayed in the base game and the free game) provided to the player may be displayed on the payout amount display portion 1005 .
  • the credit number which is presently owned by the player is displayed on the credit number display portion 1006 .
  • a background portion 1121 is arranged on the main display 1010 B.
  • the background portion 1121 is an area on the main display 1010 B other than the reel display portions 1101 through 1105 , the payout display portion 1005 , and credit number display portion 1006 .
  • the upper display 1010 A and the main display 1010 B are constructed from the liquid crystal panel as described above. However, one or more aspects of the disclosure are not limited to the liquid crystal panel. In other words, either display portion may also be the CRT display, the plasma display, the LED display, and the other well-known display device.
  • the lower display 1010 C is arranged on the lower portion of the cabinet 1002 , and is constructed from a plastic panel.
  • the drawings of the characters relating to the gaming machine, the name of the gaming machine and the like are drawn on the lower display 1010 C, and are lit up by the back lights.
  • the lower display 1010 C may also be the liquid crystal panel, the CRT display, the plasma display, the LED display, and the other well-known display device.
  • the main display 1010 B may also be configured as a hybrid type which is constructed from a mechanical reel and a transparent liquid crystal display device arranged in front of the mechanical reel.
  • the symbols drawn on the mechanical reel may be visible via the transparent liquid crystal display device.
  • Display windows the number of which is equal to that of the mechanical reels are arranged on the transparent liquid crystal display device, so that the symbols drawn on the mechanical reels may be visible via the display windows.
  • the slot machine using video reels will be mainly described in the below description, however, one or more aspects of the disclosure may also be applied to the slot machines using the mechanical reels as much as possible.
  • the spin and the stop of the mechanical reels are controlled by a motor which is not shown.
  • An operation table 1025 is arranged in front of the cabinet 1002 .
  • the operation table 1025 is arranged so as to extend forward between the main display 1010 B and the lower display 1010 C.
  • Plural types of operation buttons 1026 are provided on the operation table 1025 .
  • the operation buttons 1026 include a BET button, a collect button, a start button, a CASHOUT button and the like.
  • a coin insertion slot 1027 and a bill insertion slot 1028 are arranged on the operation table 1025 .
  • the coin insertion slot 1027 is used to receive coins which are the gaming media to the cabinet 1002 .
  • the bill insertion slot 1028 is used to receive the bills to the cabinet 1002 .
  • coins, bills or electronic value which are equivalent to coins or bills are used as the gaming media in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • the gaming media applicable in the present disclosure are not limited to coins, bills or electronic value.
  • the gaming media may also be medals, tokens, electric moneys, and tickets.
  • a coin tray 1029 is provided at the bottommost of the cabinet 1002 .
  • the coin tray 1029 is used to receive the coins paid out by a hopper 1064 .
  • a light emitting portion 1030 is provided around the cabinet 1002 of the slot machine 1001 .
  • the light emitting portion 1030 is lighted up in a predetermined lighting pattern when the player wins the game or during the event game.
  • a speaker 1031 is provided on the side surface of the cabinet 1002 . The speaker 1031 outputs sound in accordance with the progressing of the game.
  • the topper effect device 4 has a rectangular board shape, and is arranged almost parallel to the upper display 1010 A.
  • FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are block diagrams showing the internal constitution of the slot machine 1001 .
  • the slot machine 1001 includes plural constitution elements around the main control board 1071 .
  • a controller 1041 includes a main CPU 1042 , a ROM 1043 , and a RAM 1044 .
  • the main CPU 1042 inputs or outputs signals with other constitution elements via I/O port 1049 , and executes the programs stored in the ROM 1043 .
  • the main CPU 1042 serves as a control center of the slot machine 1001 .
  • the RAM 1044 stores temporarily the data and the programs when the main CPU 1042 runs. For example, the RAM 1044 temporarily stores the random number value sampled by a sampling circuit 1046 to be described later. And the identification number of the slot machine 1001 is stored in the ROM 1043 or the RAM 1044 .
  • the ROM 1043 stores the programs executed by the main CPU 1042 and the permanent data.
  • the main control board 1071 includes a random number generation circuit 1045 , a sampling circuit 1046 , a clock pulse generation circuit 1047 , and a frequency divider 1048 .
  • the random number generation circuit 1045 operates based on the instruction of the main CPU 1042 , and generates a predetermined range of random numbers.
  • the sampling circuit 1046 extracts an arbitrary random number from the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 1045 based on the instruction of the main CPU 1042 .
  • the sampling circuit 1046 inputs the extracted random number to the main CPU 1042 .
  • the clock pulse generation circuit 1047 generates a basic clock to run the main CPU 1042 .
  • the frequency divider 1048 divides the basic clock in a predetermined frequency, and inputs the divided signals to the main CPU 1042 .
  • the touch panel 1018 is connected to the main control board 1071 .
  • the touch panel 1018 may specify the coordinate position of the part to which the player touches.
  • the touch panel 1018 may determine the portion to which the player touches based on the specified coordinate position information, and determines the direction to which the touched place moves.
  • the touch panel 1018 inputs the signal corresponding to the determination result via the I/O port 1049 to the main CPU 1042 .
  • the operation buttons 1026 are connected to the main control board 1071 .
  • the operation buttons 1026 include the start button, the collect button, the BET button and the like to instruct the execution of the game.
  • the operation signal is inputted to the main CPU 1042 via the I/O port 1049 .
  • the main control board 1071 also includes an illumination effect driving circuit 1061 , a hopper driving circuit 1063 , a payout completion signal circuit 1065 and a display portion driving circuit 1067 .
  • the illumination effect driving circuit 1061 outputs effect signals to the above-mentioned light emitting portion 1030 and the topper effect device 1004 .
  • the topper effect device 1004 is serially connected to the illumination effect driving circuit 1061 through light emitting portions 1030 .
  • the effect signal is inputted, the light emitting portions 1030 and the topper effect device 1004 emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern.
  • the slot machine 1001 executes light emitting effect in accordance with the progressing of the game.
  • the hopper driving circuit 1063 drives the hopper 1064 based on the control of the main CPU 1042 .
  • the hopper 1064 executes the payout of coins, and thereby, coins are paid out to the coin tray 1029 .
  • the display portion driving circuit 1067 executes the display control of various display portions such as the payout amount display portion 1005 , the credit number display portion 1006 and the like.
  • a coin detecting portion 1066 is connected to the payout completion signal circuit 1065 .
  • the coin detecting portion 1066 calculates the number of the coins paid out by the hopper 1064 .
  • the coin detecting portion 1066 inputs the data of the calculated number of coins to the payout completion signal circuit 1065 .
  • the payout completion signal circuit 1065 determines whether the predetermined number of coins is paid out based on the data of the number of coins input by the coin detecting portion 1066 . When the coins with the predetermined number are all paid out, the signal indicating the completion of the coins is inputted to the main CPU 1042 by the payout completion signal circuit 1065 .
  • a sub-control board 1072 is connected to the main control board 1071 .
  • the sub-control board 1072 is formed on a circuit board different from that of the main control board 1071 .
  • the display control of the upper display 1010 A, the main display 1010 B and the output control of sound by the speaker 1031 are executed by the sub-control board 1072 , based on the commands inputted from the main control board 1071 .
  • the sub-control board 1072 includes a microcomputer 1073 (termed as “sub-microcomputer” hereinafter) as a main constitution element.
  • the sub-microcomputer 1073 includes a sub-CPU 1074 , a program ROM 1075 , a work RAM 1076 , an IN port 1077 and an OUT port 1080 .
  • the sub-CPU 1074 executes the control operations based on the control orders (commands) sent from the main control board 1071 .
  • the program ROM 1075 stores the control programs executed by the sub-CPU 1074 .
  • the work RAM 1076 is configured as a temporary storing device when the above control programs are executed by the sub-CPU 1074 .
  • the sub-control board 1072 executes the random number sampling on the running program of the sub-CPU 1074 .
  • the sub-control board 1072 may execute the same processes as the processes executed by the clock pulse generation circuit 1047 , the frequency divider 1048 , the random number generation circuit 1045 , and the sampling circuit 1046 in the main control board 1071 .
  • the sub-control board 1072 includes a sound source IC 1078 , a power amplifier 1079 and an image control circuit 1081 .
  • the sound source IC 1078 controls the sound output from the speaker 1031 .
  • the power amplifier 1079 is used as an amplifier for the output of the sound.
  • the image control circuit 1081 is running as the display control device of the upper display 1010 A and the main display 1010 B.
  • the image control circuit 1081 includes an image control CPU 1082 , an image control work RAM 1083 , an image control program ROM 1084 , an image ROM 1086 , a video RAM 1087 and an image control IC 1088 .
  • the image control CPU 1082 determines the images displayed on the upper display 1010 A and the main display 1010 B based on the parameters set by the sub-microcomputer 1073 and the image control programs.
  • the image control programs regarding to the display of the upper display 1010 A and the main display 1010 B and a variety of the selection tables are stored in the image control program ROM 1084 .
  • the image control work RAM 1083 serves as a temporary storing device when the image control programs are executed by the image control CPU 1082 .
  • IN port 1085 is connected to the OUT port 1080 .
  • Images corresponding to the content determined by the image control CPU 1082 are formed by the image control IC 1088 , and are output to the upper display 1010 A and the main display 1010 B.
  • the dot data used to form images are stored in the image ROM 1086 .
  • the video RAM 1087 serves as a temporary storing device when the images are formed by the image control IC 1088 .
  • the internal constitution described above is merely one example, and one or more aspects of the disclosure are not limited to the internal constitution.
  • the internal constitution may also be configured by detachably mount a memory card and/or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device) so as to read out the necessary information from the memory card and/or PLD.
  • PLD Programmable Logic Device
  • FIG. 19 shows one example of a type of symbols displayed in the reel which are variably displayed on the symbol display portion.
  • the symbols used in the embodiment include KING symbol 1051 A, QUEEN symbol 1051 B, JACK symbol 1051 C, ACE symbol 1051 D, TEN symbol 1051 E, BELL symbol 1051 F, THUNDER symbol 1051 G, and STAR symbol 1051 H.
  • the number of the symbols displayed on one reel may be determined arbitrarily. Also, the types of to-be displayed symbols may be determined arbitrarily.
  • FIG. 20 shows one example of a reel which is variably displayed on each reel display portion. As shown in FIG. 20 , the symbols shown in FIG. 19 are displayed on the reel in a predetermined sequence.
  • sequence of symbols shown in FIG. 20 is merely one example, and the sequence of the symbols may be set appropriately.
  • Each reel display portion may include plural reels, and the reel may be set to be selectable through the payout ratio which is set.
  • the games executed in the slot machine 1001 include two types of game mode. These game modes are a base game and a free game.
  • a winning combination is determined based on the number of the same symbols displayed on each of the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C and 1115 A to 1115 C of the main display 1010 B, and an award corresponding to the winning combination is provided.
  • reel rows start spinning on their respective display portions 1101 to 1105 in response to the pressing of the start button.
  • symbol rows displayed on the reel rows are scrolled from up to down on their respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 as shown in FIG. 21 .
  • the reel rows are stopped and displayed on their respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 when a predetermined time has passed.
  • a part of the symbol rows of each reel (three symbols on each of the reel display portion 1101 to 1105 with a total of fifteen symbols) are displayed on each symbol display portion in the main display 1010 B as shown in FIG. 22 .
  • the scrolling direction is not only limited to the direction from up to down, the direction may also be from down to up. Further, the scrolling direction may differ on each reel display portion. Also the scrolling direction may also be set differently to each game.
  • the stop sequence of the symbols on the reel display portions may be set appropriately. For example, all the reels may be stopped simultaneously on the reel display portions (reel display portions 1101 to 1105 ).
  • a winning combination is determined based on the number of the same symbols displayed after the reels are stopped, and award corresponding to the winning combination is provided. If the winning combination is won, the amount, which is obtained by multiplying a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination by a bet number, will be provided to the player.
  • the free game is executed in a condition that a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of scatter symbols (in this embodiment, STAR symbol 1051 H) are displayed on the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C and 1115 A to 1115 C.
  • the sequence of the free game is almost same as the base game except that no gaming value (credit) equal to the bet amount is expensed at the beginning of the game and the game is automatically executed in succession without any player's operation on the operation buttons.
  • FIG. 23 shows the content of a payout table used in the embodiment.
  • the winning combinations correspond to the awards.
  • the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 shows the payout amount when the bet number is one. In other words, when the bet number is one, the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 is paid out, and when the bet number is two or more, an amount obtained by multiplying the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 by the bet number will be paid out.
  • an amount obtained by multiplying 80 credits by the bet number will be paid out. For example, if bet number is “3”, 240 credits will be provided.
  • a payout amount corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 23 is set in a same way as described above. However, when the symbols displayed on the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C and 1115 A to 1115 C are none of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 23 , this means that the player has lost the game, and no credit will be paid out as the player has lost the game.
  • the payout table shown in FIG. 23 is one example, the types of the winning combinations and the payout amount may be set appropriately.
  • the game may be configured to contain plural payout tables, and the payout tables may be selectable in accordance with the payout ratio which is set.
  • the payout table used in the free game may be different from the payout table used in the base game.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the first main control process.
  • each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S 1001 .
  • the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 1043 and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044 .
  • diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042 .
  • the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044 and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information.
  • the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the first main game process.
  • the game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the first main game process. And the first main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • the programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 1042 .
  • the start acceptance process is executed.
  • insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are made by the player.
  • S 1012 it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 1042 corresponding to the start button.
  • the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S 1011 .
  • the start button is operated (S 1012 : YES)
  • the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S 1013 .
  • a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044 . Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • FIG. 26 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 20 are associated with code numbers.
  • FIG. 27 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 27 . The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 26 .
  • sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 . After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010 B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034 , or the like) in a unit game is started.
  • the unit game is defined as a sequence of processes which include starting of the variable display on each reel, stopping and displaying of all reels, and a payout process in which a predetermined amount of gaming medium is provided, when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
  • reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence.
  • symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C, and 1115 A to 1115 C.
  • the symbol determined in S 1013 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111 B.
  • a BELL symbol 1051 F (code number: 9) is stopped
  • a TEN symbol 1051 E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 A
  • a KING symbol 1051 A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 C (see FIG. 26 ).
  • the payout process is executed.
  • the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S 1015 is provided to the player.
  • S 1017 If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S 1017 (S 1017 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1018 . In S 1018 , a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts of the free game process.
  • the additional payout amount is determined.
  • the additional payout amount is determined from among “100”, “50”, “20” and “10” by lottery.
  • the additional payout amount may be set appropriately. Also, the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • S 1024 it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010 B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each of the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044 .
  • a payout amount addition process is executed.
  • a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S 1024 will be added.
  • the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S 1029 which is to be described later.
  • S 1026 it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1026 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1027 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1026 : NO), the procedure will be returned to S 1022 .
  • a payout process is executed.
  • a payout amount which is obtained in S 1025 is paid out to the player.
  • the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times.
  • the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game has been executed.
  • FIG. 31 shows one example of a symbol combination table.
  • code numbers of the symbols stopped on symbol portions 1111 B to 1115 B, and symbol combinations on the main display are defined.
  • the code number in FIG. 29 corresponds to the table in FIG. 26 .
  • symbol combination may be not defined.
  • the code numbers directed to the symbols to be stopped on the symbol display portions 1111 B, 1112 B, 1113 B, 1114 B, 1115 B are determined as [“13”-“13”-“13”-“13”] or [“6”-“6”-“6”-“6”-“14”].
  • the payout amount determined in S 1021 is displayed in a part of area on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 32 shows a state that the additional payout amount is displayed on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • additional payout amount is determined in the free game process.
  • the free game is executed a predetermined number, an outcome based on the game result of the free games will be provided to the player.
  • the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional payout amount.
  • reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is displayed on the reel display portion.
  • the determined additional payout amount is displayed.
  • the determined additional payout amount is paid out to the player.
  • FIG. 33 is a part of the flowchart of the free game process in the first variant of the second embodiment. Since the processes of S 1061 to S 1066 , and S 1068 are the same as the process of S 1021 to S 1027 (see FIG. 30 ), description will be omitted here. And after S 1068 , the procedure will be shifted to the S 1028 in FIG. 30 .
  • the image effect process may be also executed at S 1066 after S 1064 or S 1065 .
  • the predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121 , the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1021 .
  • FIG. 34 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding to the color of the object.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow” ⁇ “red”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue”, in accordance with the executed number of the free game.
  • the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • FIG. 35 is one example of a table in which the color change timing of the object is defined.
  • the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • image effect namely, the color change of the object
  • the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract the players.
  • each of additional payout amounts has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns to change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 36 shows a table which defines patterns to change timing in case additional payout amount “100” are defined.
  • FIG. 36 shows the patterns to change timing in the case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • Plural patterns to change timing may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a predetermined condition for example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 37 shows a state that the small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 38 shows a state that the medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 39 shows a state that big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • the moving direction of the ball is merely one example.
  • the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • a ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1021 .
  • the size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table.
  • FIG. 40 is one of examples of the table in which patterns regarding size and the timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 40
  • the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 40
  • the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • image effect namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size
  • the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect may be enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • each of additional payout amounts has plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 41 shows a table which defines patterns regarding “size and timing of the moving ball” in case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • FIG. 41 shows patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball in the case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • Plural patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • each of the additional payout amounts has plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • display pattern regarding additional payout amount candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating the additional payout amount determined and selected in S 1021 , other areas indicating not-selected additional payout amounts turn dark.
  • FIG. 42 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B when the game shifts to a free game.
  • FIG. 43 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that where “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 44 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that “50” and “10” are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 45 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that only “100” remains as the additional payout amount candidate.
  • display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1021 .
  • a table may be used when determining the display pattern.
  • FIG. 46 is one of examples of the table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display stat is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • image effect namely, the display pattern regarding the to-be-displayed additional payout amount candidates
  • the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • a sequence of dropped-out additional payout amounts among from the candidates can be set so that the larger payout amount (in the above example, “100”) is dropped out among from the candidate at last.
  • the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • sequence of dropped-out payout amounts among from the candidates can be set so that the smaller payout amount (in the above example, “10”) is dropped out among from the candidates at first.
  • the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • each of additional payout amounts has plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 47 shows a table which defines the display patterns in case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 47 shows the case where the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • Plural display patterns may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • a gaming machine directed to the second embodiment and the first variant thereof comprises a display that displays symbol display portions and a background portion, the display portions displaying reels and symbols displayed on the reels, and a processor that executes a game.
  • the game is executed in plural game modes and the plural game modes include a first game mode and a second game mode. Also, the reels are spun and then stopped in the game. Also, a part of the symbols is displayed on the symbol display portions.
  • the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode if a predetermined number or more of specific symbols are displayed in the first game mode, determines an additional payout amount when the game mode is changed to the second game mode, execute the games a predetermined number of times, provides an outcome corresponding to a result of the executed games to a player, spins the reels, stops the reels at a time when a symbol combination corresponding to the additional payout amount is displayed, provides an outcome corresponding to the additional payout amount, and changes the game mode from the second game mode to the first game mode.
  • the additional payout amount is determined in the free game process. Also, in the free game process, an image effect is made based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount.
  • an outcome based on the game result of the free game is provided to the player.
  • the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional payout amount.
  • reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is stopped on the reel display portion. Then, the determined additional payout amount is displayed. And, the determined additional payout amount is provided to the player.
  • the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and reel spin control process.
  • the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process.
  • the above described image effect process (S 1066 ) may be configured to be executed in parallel with the above described free game process ( FIG. 33 and FIG. 30 ) as a multi-process.
  • FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the second main control process.
  • each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S 1101 .
  • the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 1043 and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044 .
  • diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042 .
  • the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044 , and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information.
  • the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the second main game process.
  • the game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the second main game process. And the second main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the second main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • the programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 1042 .
  • the start acceptance process is executed.
  • insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are made by the player.
  • S 1112 it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 1042 corresponding to the start button.
  • the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S 1111 .
  • the start button is operated (S 1112 : YES)
  • the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S 1113 .
  • a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044 . Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • FIG. 50 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 20 are associated with code numbers.
  • FIG. 51 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 51 . The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 50 .
  • sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 . After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010 B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034 , or the like) in a unit game is started.
  • reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence.
  • symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C, and 1115 A to 1115 C.
  • the symbol determined in S 1113 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111 B.
  • a BELL symbol 1051 F (code number: 9) is stopped
  • a TEN symbol 1051 E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 A
  • a KING symbol 1051 A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 C (see FIG. 50 ).
  • the payout process is executed.
  • the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S 1115 is provided to the player.
  • S 1117 it is determined whether or not a free game trigger is realized. In the embodiment, in case that three or more STAR symbols 1051 H are stopped, it is determined “YES” at S 1117 .
  • S 1117 If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S 1117 (S 1117 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1118 . In S 1118 , a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts of the free game process.
  • the additional number of games is determined.
  • the additional number of games may be determined and selected from among “10”, “8”, “5” and “3” by lottery.
  • the additional number of games may be set appropriately.
  • the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • S 1124 it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010 B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044 .
  • a payout amount addition process is executed.
  • a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S 1124 will be added.
  • the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S 1128 which is to be described later.
  • S 1127 it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1127 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1128 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1127 : NO), the procedure will be returned to S 1122 .
  • a payout process is executed.
  • a payout amount which is accumulated in S 1125 is paid out to the player.
  • the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times.
  • the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • FIG. 55 shows a state that the additional number of games is displayed on the part of the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • S 1132 it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010 B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code numbers of respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044 .
  • a payout amount addition process is executed.
  • a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S 1132 will be added.
  • the added payout amount is paid out to the player in the payout process of S 1135 which is to be described later.
  • S 1134 it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the additional number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the additional number of times (S 1134 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1135 . On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the additional number of times (S 1134 : NO), the procedure will be returned to S 1130 .
  • a payout process is executed.
  • a payout amount added in S 1132 is paid out to the player.
  • the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game has been executed by the predetermined number of times.
  • the added payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • the predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121 , the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S 1121 .
  • FIG. 56 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding the color of the object.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow” ⁇ “red”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow”, in accordance with the executed number of free games.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue”, in accordance with the executed number of the free game.
  • the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • FIG. 57 is one example of a table in which color change timing of the object is defined.
  • the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • image effect namely, the color change of the object
  • the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is heightened, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • each of additional number of games has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns to change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 58 shows a table that defines patterns to change timing in case the additional number of games is “10”.
  • FIG. 58 shows patterns to change timing in the case where the additional number of games is “10”.
  • Plural patterns to change timing may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a predetermined condition for example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 59 shows a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 60 shows a state that a medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 61 shows a state that big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • the moving direction of the ball is merely one example.
  • the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • a ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S 1121 .
  • the size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table.
  • FIG. 62 is one of examples of the table in which patterns regarding size and the timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • image effect namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size
  • the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect may be enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • each of additional number of games may have plural patterns regarding “sizes and timing of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 63 shows a table that defines patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” in the case the additional number of games is “100”.
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • FIG. 63 shows patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball in the case where the additional number of games is “10”.
  • Plural patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • display pattern regarding additional-number-of-games candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating an additional number of games determined and selected in S 1121 , areas indicating not-selected additional number of games turn dark.
  • FIG. 64 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B when the game mode is shifted to free game.
  • FIG. 65 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • FIG. 66 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that “8” and “5” are dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • FIG. 67 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that only “10” remains as the additional-number-of-games candidate.
  • display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S 1121 .
  • a table may be used when determining the display pattern.
  • FIG. 68 is one of examples of the table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • image effect namely, the display pattern regarding to-be-displayed additional-number-of-games candidates
  • the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • sequence of dropped-out numbers among from the candidates can be set so that a larger additional number of games (in the above example, “10”) is dropped out among from the candidates at last.
  • a larger additional number of games in the above example, “10”
  • the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • sequence of dropped-out number among from the candidates can be set so that a smaller additional number of games (in the above example, “3”) is dropped out among from the candidates at first.
  • the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • each additional number of games may have plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 69 shows a table that defines the display patterns in case that the additional number of games is “10”.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • FIG. 69 shows the case where the additional number of games is “10”.
  • Plural display patterns may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • a gaming machine directed to the second embodiment and the second variant thereof comprises a display that displays symbol display portions and a background portion, the display portions displaying reels and symbols displayed on the reels, and a processor that executes a game.
  • the game is executed in plural game modes and the plural game modes include a first game mode and a second game mode. Also, the reels are spun and then stopped in the game. Also, a part of the symbols is displayed on the symbol display portions.
  • the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode if a predetermined number or more of specific symbols are displayed in the first game mode, determines an additional number of games when the game mode is changed to the second game mode, executes the games a predetermined number in the second game mode, makes an image effect on the background portion of the display based on a number of the executed games and the additional number of games in the second game mode, displays the additional number of games after the games are executed the predetermined number, execute the games the additional number, provide an outcome corresponding to a game result of the games executed the predetermined number and a game result of the games executed the additional number, and changes the game mode from the second game mode to the first game mode.
  • the additional number of games is determined in the free game process. Also, in the free game process, an image effect is made based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional number of games.
  • an outcome based on the game result of the free game is provided to the player.
  • the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional number of games.
  • reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is stopped on the reel display portion. Then, the determined additional number of games is displayed. And, the determined additional number of games is provided to the player.
  • the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and reel spin control process.
  • the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process.
  • the above described image effect process (S 1126 ) may be configured to be executed in parallel with the above described free game process ( FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 ) as a multi-process.
  • FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the third main control program.
  • each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S 1201 .
  • the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 43 , and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044 .
  • diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042 .
  • the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044 , and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information.
  • the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the third main game process.
  • the game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the third main game process.
  • the third main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the third main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • the programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 42 .
  • the start acceptance process is executed.
  • insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are executed by the player.
  • S 1212 it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 42 corresponding to the start button.
  • the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S 1211 .
  • the start button is operated (S 1212 : YES)
  • the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S 1213 .
  • a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044 . Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • FIG. 72 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 8 are associated with code numbers.
  • FIG. 73 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 73 . The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 72 .
  • sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 . After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010 B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034 , or the like) in a unit game is started.
  • reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence.
  • symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111 A to 1111 C, 1112 A to 1112 C, 1113 A to 1113 C, 1114 A to 1114 C, and 1115 A to 1115 C.
  • the symbol determined in S 1213 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111 B.
  • a BELL symbol 1051 F (code number: 9) is stopped
  • a TEN symbol 1051 E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 A
  • a KING symbol 1051 A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111 C (see FIG. 72 ).
  • the payout process is executed.
  • the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S 1215 is provided to the player.
  • S 1217 it is determined whether or not a free game trigger is realized. In the embodiment, in case that three or more STAR symbols 1051 H are stopped, it is determined “YES” at S 1217 .
  • S 1217 If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S 1217 (S 1217 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1218 . In S 1218 , a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the free game process.
  • the additional payout amount is determined.
  • the additional payout amount is determined and selected from among “100”, “50”, “20” and “10” by lottery.
  • the additional payout amount may be set appropriately. Also, the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • S 1224 it is determined whether the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010 B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044 .
  • a payout amount addition process is executed.
  • a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S 1224 will be added.
  • the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S 1229 which is to be described later.
  • S 1227 it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1227 : YES), the procedure will be shifted to S 1228 . On the other hand, when it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S 1227 : NO), the procedure will be returned to S 1222 .
  • a payout process is executed.
  • a payout amount which is accumulated in S 1225 is paid out to the player.
  • the added payout amount is paid out in at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. However, the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • the predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121 , the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1221 .
  • FIG. 77 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding the color of the object.
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow” ⁇ “red”, in accordance with the executed number of free games.
  • the additional payout amount is “50”
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue” ⁇ “yellow”, in accordance with the number of executed free games.
  • the additional payout amount is “20”
  • the color of the object may be changed “green” ⁇ “blue”, in accordance with the executed number of free games.
  • the additional payout amount is “10”, the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • FIG. 78 is one example of a table in which color change timing of the object is defined.
  • the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 78
  • the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 78
  • the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • the player since the image effect (namely, the change of the color of the object) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is heightened, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • each additional payout amount has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns t o change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 79 shows a table which defines patterns to change timing in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • FIG. 79 shows patterns to change timing in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns to change timing, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a predetermined condition for example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 80 shows a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 81 shows a state that a medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • FIG. 82 shows state that a big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010 B.
  • the moving direction of the ball is merely one example.
  • the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • the ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1221 .
  • the size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table.
  • FIG. 83 is one example of a table in which patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 83
  • a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a big size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 83
  • a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • a medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121 .
  • image effect namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size
  • the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • each additional payout amount may have plural patterns regarding “sizes and timings of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 84 shows a table which defines patterns regarding “size and timing of the moving ball” in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • FIG. 84 shows patterns regarding size and the timing of moving ball in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • Plural patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • a display pattern regarding additional payout amount candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating the additional payout amount determined in S 1221 , other areas indicating not-selected additional payout amount turn dark.
  • FIG. 85 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B when the game mode is shifted to free game. In FIG. 85 , all the additional payout amount candidates are displayed.
  • FIG. 86 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 87 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that “50” and “10” are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 88 shows a display example of the main display 1010 B showing a state that only “100” remains as additional payout amount candidate.
  • display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S 1221 .
  • a table may be used when determining the display pattern.
  • FIG. 89 is one example of a table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 89
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 89
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 89
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 89
  • a display pattern is changed to a state showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • the image effect namely, the display pattern regarding to-be-displayed additional payout amount candidates
  • the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • sequence of dropped-out additional payout amount from the candidates can be set so that a larger additional payout amount (in the above example, “100”) is dropped out among from the candidates at last. Also, the sequence of dropped-out additional payout amount from the candidates can be set so that a smaller additional payout amount (in the above example, “10”) from the candidates at first.
  • the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • each additional payout amount may have plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 90 shows a table which defines the display patterns the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • FIG. 90 shows patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the third variant thereof comprises plural reels; a display device having a display portion and a background portion, the display portion displaying plural symbols displayed on each of the plural reels; and a processor to execute a game, wherein the game is executed in plural game modes, the plural game modes comprising a first game mode and a second game mode, in the game, the plural reels spin and then stop, a part of the plural symbols are displayed on a symbol display portion of the display device as a result of the game, the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode, during the first game mode, when predetermined symbols with a predetermined number or more are displayed, determines an additional payout amount when the game mode changes to the second game mode, executes the game for a predetermined number in the second game mode, executes an image effect corresponding to a number of executed games and the additional payout amount on the background portion of the display device during the second game mode, displays the determined additional payout amount is displayed
  • additional payout amount is determined in the free game process.
  • an image effect process is executed based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount.
  • various image effects may be executed.
  • the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and the reel spin control process.
  • the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process.
  • the above described image effect process (S 1226 ) may be configured to be executed in parallel to the above described free game process ( FIG. 75 ) as a multi-process.
  • the one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment including the first through third variants are not limited to the above embodiment and various changes and modifications can be done within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the reels used in the base game and the free game may be different.
  • the reels used in the free game may be more favorable to the player than the reels used in the base game.
  • One or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and any variants of the second embodiment may be applied to the game system with link progressive bonus. And, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied to various card games.
  • one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied as a gaming method to execute the above process. Further, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied to the program for executing the gaming method by computer, or may be applied as record medium (tangible medium) in which the program is recorded.
  • a slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment for example, has an image display device such as a liquid crystal display and the like, and executes a game by displaying various symbol images on the image display device. That is, the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment is realized as a video slot machine.
  • the slot machine 2100 may also be implemented as a hybrid type slot machine which is configured from a mechanical reel and a transparent liquid crystal display device arranged in front of the mechanical reel.
  • the slot machine 2100 may also be implemented as a mechanical slot machine having mechanical reels.
  • decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are arranged around a main display 2004 of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 emit light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2300 is transmitted.
  • the light emitting device 2300 is arranged at a side surface on a cabinet 2002 of the slot machine 2100 . Further, the light emitted in the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted by an optical cable 2090 .
  • FIG. 91 shows an external perspective of the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment.
  • the slot machine 2100 is an upright type slot machine which is provided in a game hall such as a casino.
  • the external perspective of the slot machine 2100 as shown in FIG. 91 is merely one example, and one or more aspects of the disclosure is not limited to the external perspective of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the slot machine 2100 includes a cabinet 2002 .
  • the cabinet 2002 is an accommodation portion which accommodates the electric or the mechanic elements.
  • the cabinet 2002 includes a front door 2024 .
  • the front door 2024 is attached to the main body of the cabinet 2002 by hinge members and the like.
  • the slot machine 2100 includes an upper display 2003 and a main display 2004 at the front side of the cabinet 2002 .
  • the upper display 2003 is located on the upper column of the cabinet 2002 and the main display 2004 is located on the middle column of the cabinet 2002 .
  • the upper display 2003 is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. Effect images, a payout table in the game, game rules and the like are displayed on the upper display 2003 .
  • the main display 2004 is constructed from the liquid crystal panel.
  • the main display 2004 for example, has plural reel display parts. Each of the reels are variably displayed and stopped.
  • a touch panel 2201 is arranged on the front side of the main display 2004 .
  • a player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 2201 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 . Arrangement places of the decoration parts may be arbitrary, for example, the decoration parts may also be arranged around the cabinet 2002 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light emitted from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side (the player side) of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 , the movement of the player's viewpoint between the main display 2004 and each decoration part may be reduced. Also, the display in which the game is executed will become highly visible so that the player may concentrate in the game.
  • the slot machine becomes more noticeable than the other slot machines by arranging the decoration parts around the cabinet 2002 , so that it may attract more players.
  • An operation table 2005 is arranged below the main display 2004 with one side extending to a front side of the main display 2004 .
  • An exchange button 2006 , a payback button 2007 , a help button 2008 , a coin insertion slot 2009 , a bill insertion slot 2010 , a 1-BET button 2011 , a spin button 2012 , a 3-BET button 2013 , a 5-BET button 2014 , and a 8-BET button 2015 are arranged on the operation table 2005 .
  • the arrangement positions of these buttons may be set arbitrarily. Also, a part of the above buttons may be deleted or new buttons may be added or replaced if necessary.
  • the exchange button 2006 is a button to be pressed when a bill inserted from the bill insertion slot 2010 needs to be exchanged.
  • the exchanged coins by the pressing of the exchange button 2006 are paid out to a coin receiving part 2017 from a coin payout slot 2016 .
  • the coin payout slot 2016 is provided at the bottom of the cabinet 2002 .
  • An exchange switch 2062 is connected to the exchange button 2006 .
  • the payback button 2007 is a button to be pressed when a game is terminated. When the payback button 2007 is pressed, the coins which are obtained in the game will be paid out to the coin receiving part 2017 from the coin payout slot 2016 .
  • a payback switch 2063 is connected to the payback button 2007 .
  • the help button 2008 is a button to be pressed when an operation method of a game will be displayed. When the help button 2008 is pressed, various help information will be displayed on the upper display 2003 .
  • a help switch 2064 is connected to the help button 2008 .
  • a coin sensor 2065 is connected to the coin insertion slot 2009 .
  • coin detecting signal is output to a CPU 2050 through the coin sensor 2065 .
  • a bill sensor 2066 is connected to the bill insertion slot 2010 .
  • bill detecting signal is output to the CPU 2050 through the bill sensor 2066 .
  • the 3-BET button 2013 , the 5-BET button 2014 and the 8-BET button 2015 are the buttons to be pressed when three credits, five credits and eight credits are betted.
  • a 3-BET switch 2059 , a 5-BET switch 2060 and a 8-BET switch 2061 are connected to the 3-BET button 2013 , the 5-BET button 2014 and the 8-BET button 2015 respectively.
  • a coin detecting portion 2073 constructed from sensors and the like is arranged inside the coin payout slot 2016 .
  • the coin detecting portion 2073 detects number of coins paid out from the coin payout slot 2016 .
  • FIG. 92 is a block diagram schematically showing the control system of the slot machine.
  • the CPU 2050 is configured as a core of the slot machine 2100 .
  • a ROM 2051 and a RAM 2052 are connected to the CPU 2050 .
  • Various programs and data tables and the like which are necessary in the control of slot machine 2100 are stored in the ROM 2051 .
  • various control programs and data tables and the like are stored in the ROM 2051 , wherein various control programs include main process programs and the like to be described later, data tables include a lottery table to determine the stop display symbols of the game by lottery and the like.
  • the RAM 2052 is a memory to temporarily store various data calculated by the CPU 2050 .
  • a clock pulse generation circuit 2053 , a frequency divider 2054 , a random number generation circuit 2055 and a random number sampling circuit 2056 are connected to the CPU 2050 .
  • the clock pulse generation circuit 2053 is used to generate a basic clock pulse
  • the random number generation circuit 2055 is used to generate random numbers.
  • the random numbers sampled through the random number sampling circuit 2056 is used in the various lotteries of the winning combinations and the like.
  • Each switch provided in each button of the operation table 2005 is connected to the CPU 2050 respectively. That is, the spin switch 2057 , the 1-BET switch 2058 , the 3-BET switch 2059 , the 5-BET switch 2060 , the 8-BET switch 2061 , the exchange switch 2062 , the payback switch 2063 , the help switch 2064 are connected to the CPU 2050 , respectively.
  • the CPU 2050 When the CPU 2050 receives the switch signal from each switch based on the pressing of each button, the control to conduct various movements corresponding to the button which is connected to the received switch signal is executed by the CPU 2050 .
  • the coin sensor 2065 and the bill sensor 2066 are connected to the CPU 2050 , respectively.
  • the coin sensor 2065 detects coins which are inserted from the coin insertion slot 2009 .
  • the CPU 2050 calculates the number of inserted coins based on the coin detecting signal output from the coin sensor 2065 .
  • the bill sensor 2066 detects the type and the amount of the bills which are inserted from the bill insertion slot 2010 , and outputs a bill detecting signal.
  • the CPU 2050 may calculate an equivalent number of coins to the amount of bills based on the bill detecting signal.
  • a hopper 2071 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a hopper driving circuit 2070 .
  • the hopper 2071 payouts a predetermined number of coins from the coin payout slot 2016 .
  • a coin detecting portion 2073 located inside the coin payout slot 2016 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a payout completion signal circuit 2072 .
  • a coin payout detecting signal is output to the payout completion signal circuit 2072 .
  • the payout completion signal circuit 2072 outputs a payout completion signal to the CPU 2050 based on the coin payout detecting signal.
  • the upper display 2003 and the main display 2004 are connected to the CPU 2050 via a liquid crystal driving circuit 2074 .
  • display modes of the upper display 2003 and the main display 2004 are controlled by the CPU 2050 , respectively.
  • a touch panel 2201 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a touch panel driving circuit 2202 .
  • the touch panel 2201 is provided on the screen of the main display 2004 as described above.
  • the CPU 2050 may determine where the player has touched by referring to the coordinate position information of the part that the player touches, via the touch panel driving circuit 2202 . That is, the CPU 2050 can determine the operation mode of the touch panel 2201 .
  • a LED 2078 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a LED driving circuit 2077 .
  • the LED 2078 is arranged at the light emitting device 2300 .
  • the LED 2078 is lighting controlled by the LED driving circuit 2077 .
  • the lighting mode of the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 , 2022 is controlled by the LED driving circuit 2077 .
  • a sound output circuit 2079 and a speaker 2080 are connected to the CPU 2050 .
  • the speaker 2080 generates various sound effect based on the output signal from the sound output circuit 2079 when various performances are conducted.
  • FIG. 93 shows an external view of the slot machine 2100 when the front door 2024 is in an open state.
  • the hopper 2071 and a control box 2500 are arranged inside the cabinet 2002 .
  • the elements to connect the hopper 2071 and the coin detecting slot 2016 is omitted.
  • the control box 2500 contains the CPU 2050 , the ROM 2051 , the RAM 2052 and various driving circuit and the like.
  • An arrangement position of the control box 2500 is arbitrary, and may be determined with consideration of heat and/or noise.
  • the optical cable 2090 and cable storage parts 2025 , 2026 and 2027 are provided inside the cabinet 2002 .
  • cable storage parts 2025 , 2026 and 2027 are facing to the decoration part 2020 , 2021 and 2022 , respectively.
  • one end of the optical cable 2090 is stored in each cable storage part 2025 , 2026 and 2027 .
  • the light received on the other end of the optical cable 2090 is transmitted to the end of the optical cable 2090 which is stored in the cable storage part 2025 , 2026 and 2027 , and the transmitted light is diffused by the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 .
  • coins, bills or electronic value which are equivalent to coins or bills are used as the gaming media in the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment.
  • the gaming media applicable in the disclosure are not limited to coins, bills or electronic value.
  • the gaming media may also be medals, tokens, electric moneys, and tickets.
  • FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2300 .
  • FIG. 94 is a view seen from a X direction of FIG. 91 .
  • plural LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2300 .
  • a LED driving circuit 2077 is connected to each LED 2078 respectively.
  • a light emitter other than the LED for example, light bulbs and the like
  • the LED in the embodiment is merely one example of the light emitter according to the disclosure.
  • the light emitting device 2300 may be sized down by arranging the LED driving circuit 2077 inside the cabinet 2002 . Since the length of the cable between the LED driving circuit 2077 and the light emitting device 2300 is shorten by placing the LED driving circuit 2077 close to the light emitting device 2300 , it is preferred in the countermeasure of noise.
  • Convex lenses 2091 corresponding to the LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2300 . Also, plural optical cables 2090 each correspond to each convex lens 2091 are provided. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 2078 is condensed at each convex lens 2091 , and is received at one end of the optical cable 2090 .
  • FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2300 and the cabinet 2002 .
  • FIG. 95 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 91 .
  • a LED driving circuit 2077 is arranged inside the cabinet 2002 .
  • One end of each optical cable 2090 is stored in the cable storage part 2025 , 2026 and 2027 .
  • the light emitted from the LEDs 2078 inside the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted to the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 .
  • FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 .
  • the light emitted from the LED 2078 is condensed at convex lens 2091 , and the condensed light is received at one end of the optical cable 2090 .
  • the light is transmitted in the optical cable 2090 , from one end to the other end.
  • the light emitted from the other end is irradiated toward the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 , and then the light is diffused by the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 .
  • the light emitting mode of the LED 2078 is determined by the LED driving circuit 2077 , effects in which each decoration part is lighted at a predetermined timing in the game may be conducted.
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2100 .
  • the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2300 is transmitted.
  • the light emitting device 2300 is arranged on the side surface of the cabinet 2002 in the slot machine 2100 . Further, the light emitted inside the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted by the optical cable 2090 .
  • the convex lens 2091 may be omitted by providing the LED 2078 close to the one end of the optical cable 2090 inside the light emitting device 2300 . Also, the convex lens 2091 may be omitted by increasing the directional quality of the LED 2078 .
  • the exchange of the LED 2078 may be easily conducted. And, the game in the slot machine 2100 may be executed even when the exchange of the LED 2078 is conducted. This is very favorable in the case where the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment is provided in the environment in which the slot machine 2100 is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the LEDs 2078 will not influence the elements inside the cabinet 2002 . And, since the light emitted from the LED 2078 is transmitted by the optical cable 2090 , the transmission efficiency of the light is high.
  • FIG. 97 shows a condition where the front door 2024 of the slot machine according to the embodiment is opened.
  • the same number as that used in the slot machine 2100 of the third embodiment indicates the same or corresponding part in the construction of the slot machine 2100 according to the above third embodiment.
  • a slot machine 2101 according to the embodiment does not include an optical cable and a cable storage part.
  • reflecting plates 2092 are arranged in predetermined positions inside the cabinet 2002 and light emitting device 2301 .
  • control system of the slot machine 2101 is the same as that of the slot machine 2100 according to the third embodiment, description on the control system will be omitted.
  • FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2301 .
  • FIG. 98 is a view seen from a X direction in FIG. 97 .
  • plural LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2301 .
  • a LED driving circuit 2077 is connected to each LED 2078 , respectively.
  • a light emitter other than the LED for example, light bulbs and the like
  • the transmission efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 2078 may be increased by strengthening the directional quality of the LED 2078 .
  • Reflecting plates 2092 each corresponds to each LED 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2301 , respectively.
  • Each of reflecting plates 2092 is provided with a predetermined angle inside the light emitting device 2301 . That is, each reflecting plate 2092 is arranged in a necessary angle to transmit the incident light so as to any of the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 .
  • FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2020 . Also, FIG. 99 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97 .
  • the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301 , and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 .
  • the light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002 , and is transmitted to the decoration part 2020 .
  • FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2021 . Also, FIG. 100 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97 .
  • the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301 , and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 .
  • the light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002 , and is transmitted to the decoration part 2021 .
  • FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are schematic diagrams showing conditions where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2022 . Also, FIG. 102 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97 .
  • the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301 , and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 .
  • the light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002 , and is transmitted to the decoration part 2022 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 of the slot machine 2101 .
  • the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2101 .
  • the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020 , 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2301 is transmitted.
  • the light emitting device 2301 is arranged on the side surface of the cabinet 2002 in the slot machine 2101 . Further, the light emitted inside the light emitting device 2301 is transmitted by the reflecting plate 2092 .
  • the exchange of the LED 2078 may be easily conducted. And the game in the slot machine 2101 may be executed even when the exchange of the LED 2078 is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the slot machine 2101 according to the embodiment is provided in the environment where the slot machine 2101 is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the LED 2078 will not influence the elements inside the cabinet 2002 . Further, since the light is transmitted through the reflecting plate, there is no need to wire inside the main body.
  • optical cable 2090 and the reflecting plate 2092 may be used in combination.
  • the disclosure may also be applied to various card gaming machines and roulette machines.
  • the disclosure directed to the third embodiment is applicable to the slot machines directed to the first and second embodiments. More specifically, the slot machines as described in the first and second embodiments may be configured to include a main body having a decoration part and a light emitting device arranged outside the main body. Further, light emitted from the replaceable light emitter is transmitted to the decoration part. Further, the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter.
  • light emitted from the replaceable light emitter is transmitted to the decoration part.
  • the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • the light emitter since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise.
  • the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter and a lens condensing light emitted from the light emitter.
  • the optical cable transmits the condensed light to the decoration part.
  • the decoration part diffuses the transmitted light.
  • the light emitter since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise. Further, since the light emitted from the light emitter is transmitted by the optical cable, transmission efficiency of the light is high.
  • the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter.
  • the reflecting plate reflects light emitted from the replaceable light emitter.
  • light reflected by the reflecting plate is transmitted to the decoration part.
  • the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • the light emitter since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise. Further, since the light is transmitted through the reflecting plate, there is no need to wire inside the main body.

Abstract

A processer randomly designates the predetermined number of special symbol display areas from among symbol display areas when a free game starts. Subsequently, reels stop rotating to position a symbol in each of the symbol display areas. In case wild symbol(s) is/are repositioned in the specific symbol display area(s), the wild symbol(s) repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). In the subsequent free game(s), symbols will be repositioned in symbol display areas other than one(s) in which the wild symbol(s) has/have been placed in a hold state.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is based upon and claims a priority from the U.S. provisional Patent Application No. 61/090,324 filed on Aug. 20, 2008, the entire contents thereof are incorporated herein by reference.
  • BACKGROUND
  • 1. Technical Field
  • The slot machine according to one more aspects of the disclosure relates to a slot machine that executes a free game, in addition to a base game, when a predetermined condition has been satisfied during the base game.
  • 2. Description of Related Art
  • Conventionally, in a slot machine, which is one type of a gaming machine, a game is started by inserting coins, or the like, in the gaming machine. In the game, a symbol columns is variably displayed in a predetermined area in the gaming machine, and after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the symbol string is stopped and displayed. Then a payout is awarded based on a combination of the symbols thus stopped.
  • Generally, whether or not a winning combination for which a payout is awarded is established is determined depending on whether a predetermined number of the same kind of symbols (for instance, “CHERRY” and “7”) are positioned along a pay line set in advance. Conventionally, if a predetermined number or more of the same kind of symbols are positioned, a payout was also awarded based on the number of symbols thus positioned, irrespective of the pay line.
  • A large number of conventional slot machines execute two kinds of games, including a base game and a free game. The base game is executed by consumption of a gaming value (coins, credits, etc) corresponding to a bet amount. Alternatively, the free game is executed without consumption of any gaming value corresponding to the bet amount.
  • Switching from the base game to the free game occurs if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the case that a specific symbol(s) is(are) stopped and displayed during the base game. Switching from the free game to the base game occurs if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the case that a free game has been carried out by a predetermined number of times.
  • Further, in a conventional slot machine, the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved by making it easier to establish a combination for which payout is awarded in the free game in comparison with the case of the base game.
  • However, it is difficult to grasp whether or not winning-prize probability is heightened on the surface of the slot machine. Therefore, it was actually difficult to make the player recognize the heightened winning-prize probability, which caused the player to decrease his/her sense of expectancy for a free game
  • The object of the disclosure is to provide a slot machine capable of providing games contents of which are visually easy to understand and attractive enough for the player who expects winning large-amount prize by executing a next game with specific symbol(s) being placed in a hold state at specific symbol display area(s), in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s).
  • SUMMARY
  • Therefore, in order to achieve the object, according to a slot machine of the disclosure encompassing one or more aspects thereof, there is provided a slot machine. The slot machine comprises a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor. The processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas. The processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game. The processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game. The processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state. The processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned. Thereby, the contents of games are made visually easy for the player to understand and the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved. As games in a free game advance, the number of specific symbol(s) placed in a hold state may increase gradually. Thereby, it makes it possible to provide a game which attracts the player who expects to win a high payout is enhanced.
  • According to the disclosure encompassing one or more aspects, there is provided a slot machine. The slot machine comprises a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor. The processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas. The processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game. The processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game. The processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state. The processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned. Thereby, the contents of games are made visually easy for the player to understand and the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved. Furthermore, the number of specific symbol display areas and locations thereof are randomly selected through a lottery process. Therefore the game will not go monotonous and entertainment characteristics of the slot machine can be improved.
  • According to the disclosure encompassing one or more aspects, there is provided a slot machine. The slot machine comprises a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and a processor. The processor repositions symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas. The processor executes a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game. The processor designates one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas every game or every plurality of games in a free game. The processor places, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state. The processor repositions symbols not placed in the hold state and awards a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned. Thereby, the contents of games are made visually easy for the player to understand and the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved. Furthermore, the number of specific symbol display areas and locations thereof are randomly selected for each game or every certain number of games through a lottery process. Therefore the game will not go monotonous and entertainment characteristics of the slot machine can be improved.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification illustrate embodiments of the disclosure and, together with the description, serve to explain the objects, advantages and principles of the disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a view showing a characteristic part of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 3 is a front view showing a symbol display portion of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 4 shows an example of a symbol column positioned in reel during a base game and a free game of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 5 is a chart showing relation of variety of symbols and payouts which are used in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the entirety of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub control board installed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 8 is an explanatory view explaining about the base game and the free game executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main control process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main game process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a free-game process program executed in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the first embodiment;
  • FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the another embodiment;
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 14 is an external perspective view of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing reel display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory view showing symbol display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an internal constitution of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an internal constitution of the sub-control board of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing a symbol displayed on a reel of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory view showing a symbol row displayed on the reel of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 21 is an explanatory view showing a state that the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 22 is an explanatory view showing a state that symbols are stopped on the symbol display portions of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing content of a payout table of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a first main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a first main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 27 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing one example of a symbol combination table in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a state that additional payout amount is displayed on a background portion of a main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of an object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a state that a middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing a state that a large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure;
  • FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a second main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a second main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 51 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view showing a state that an additional number of games is displayed on a background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 56 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 57 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing a state that the small size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 60 is an explanatory view showing a state that the middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state that the large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing one example of display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 65 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 68 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a third main control process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 71 is a flowchart of a third main game process in the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates code numbers with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with code numbers in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 74 is an explanatory view showing a table which associates random number values with symbols in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a free game process in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing a state that an additional payout amount is displayed on the background portion of a main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 77 is an explanatory view showing one example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines patterns regarding timing to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing another example of patterns to change color of the object in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing a state that the small size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a state that the middle size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing a state that the large size ball moves from the left side to the right side on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 83 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing a table which defines patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 87 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 88 is an explanatory view showing one example of the display content on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 89 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing one example of a table which defines display patterns on the background portion of the main display in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment;
  • FIG. 91 is a view showing an external appearance of a slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 92 is a block diagram schematically showing a control system of the slot machine in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 93 is a view showing an external appearance of the slot machine in a condition where a front door of the slot machine is opened in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing an internal configuration of a light emitting device in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing an internal configuration of the light emitting device and a cabinet in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from LED is transmitted to a decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 97 is a view showing an external appearance of the slot machine in a condition where a front door of the slot machine is opened in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment;
  • FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment; and
  • FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED is transmitted to the decoration part in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The various aspects summarized previously may be embodied in various forms. The following description shows by way of illustration of various combinations and configurations in which the aspects may be practiced. It is understood that the described aspects and/or embodiments are merely examples, and that other aspects and/or embodiments may be utilized and structural and functional modifications may be made, without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • It is noted that various connections are set forth between items in the following description. It is noted that these connections in general and, unless specified otherwise, may be direct or indirect and that this specification is not intended to be limiting in this respect.
  • A slot machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the drawings based on an embodiment embodying one or more aspects of the disclosure. However, it is appreciated that one or more aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in distributable (via CD and the like) or downloadable software games, console games, and the like. In this regard, the slot machine may be a virtual slot machine that is displayed on a multi-purpose computer and/or dedicated kiosk. Aspects of the disclosure are described by way of hardware elements. However, it is appreciated that these elements may also be software modules that are executable in a computer. The software modules may be stored on a computer readable medium, including but not limited to a USB drive, CD, DVD, computer-readable memory, tape, diskette, floppy disk, and the like. For instance, aspects of the disclosure may be embodied in a JAVA-based application or the like that runs in a processor or processors. Further, the terms “CPU”, “processor”, and “controller” are inclusive by nature, including at least one of hardware, software, or firmware. These terms may include a portion of a processing unit in a computer (for instance, in multiple core processing units), multiple cores, a functional processor (as running virtually on at least one of processor or server, which may be local or remote). Further, in network-based gaming systems, the processor may include only a local processor, only a remote server, or a combination of a local processor and a remote server.
  • It is contemplated that one or more aspects of the disclosure may be implemented as computer executable instructions on a computer readable medium such as a non-volatile memory, a magnetic or optical disc. Further, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be implemented with a carrier signal in the form of, for instance, an audio-frequency, radio-frequency, or optical carrier wave.
  • Hereinafter, a slot machine according to the disclosure will now be described in detail in a first to third embodiments relating to the slot machine, while referring to the drawings.
  • First Embodiment
  • The slot machine according to the first embodiment to be described hereinafter is a so-called video slot machine which has an image display device such as a liquid crystal display and in which a game is executed by displaying various kinds of symbol image on the image display device.
  • The slot machine according to the disclosure executes two types of games: a base game which is executed with consuming a gaming value corresponding to the bet amount placed by a player; and a free game (bonus game) which is executed without consuming a gaming value. Also in a free game, from among a plurality of symbol display areas, symbol display area(s) at specific location(s) is/are previously designated as specific symbol display areas. As shown in FIG. 1, in case a wild symbol 11 is repositioned in a designated specific symbol display area, the wild symbol repositioned in the specific symbol display area will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). In the subsequent free game(s), symbols will be repositioned in symbol display areas other than the one(s) in which the wild symbol(s) has/have been placed in a hold state. Furthermore, location(s) and the number of symbol display areas designated as specific symbol display area(s) varies in each game which constitutes the free game.
  • Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described based on FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an outer appearance of the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment is an upright-type slot machine installed in a gaming arcade such as a casino or the like. This slot machine 1 has a cabinet 2, a main door 3 provided at a front face of the cabinet 2, and a topper effect device 4 arranged at an upper side of the cabinet 2.
  • The cabinet 2 is a housing portion that houses electrical or mechanical components. These electrical or mechanical components are used in execution of a predetermined game aspect.
  • The main door 3 has an upper display portion 10A, a mid-stage variable display portion 10B and a lower display portion 10C, functioning as a display portion 10 that displays information with respect to the game. The upper display portion 10A has an upper liquid crystal panel 11A which is arranged at an upper side of the variable display portion 10B. The upper liquid crystal panel 11A displays, for instance, effect images, an introduction to the game contents, explanation of game rules, payout tables, a sub game result to be later described and the like. The lower display portion 10C is arranged at a lower side of the variable display portion 10B and has a plastic panel 11C onto which an image has been printed. This plastic panel 11C is lit up with a backlight.
  • The variable display portion 10B that displays an execution state of the game has a main liquid crystal panel 11B constituted of a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel which is fixedly mounted to the main door 3. Here, the main liquid crystal panel 11B is constituted of a heretofore known liquid crystal panel and has a symbol display portion 12 which comprises a 3×5 matrix of symbol display areas. The symbol display portion 12 is constituted of five reels 13 through 17. With respect to the respective reels 13 through 17, the symbol columns with the alignment set in advance (FIG. 4) are displayed in a scrolled manner during a base game and a free game, and after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, three symbols are respectively stopped and displayed in each reel. As a result, fifteen symbols are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game as will be described later, and a predetermined payout is awarded to the player in accordance with the combination of the displayed symbols and the credit amount (bet amount) thus betted. The number of reels may be three, and further, the number of displayed symbols is not limited to fifteen.
  • Particularly, in a free game, frame(s) 101 is(are) indicated at symbol display area(s) designated as specific symbol display area(s) in the 3×5 symbol display areas (see FIG. 1).
  • Further, a touch panel 18 is provided at a front face of the main liquid crystal panel 11B. The player can operate the touch panel 18 to input various types of commands.
  • At a right lower side of the variable display portion 10B, there are provided a payout amount display portion 19 and a credit amount display portion 20. The payout amount display portion 19 displays, as a payout amount, a payout amount to be awarded in a case where the symbol combination which is stopped and displayed on the pay line in a base game is a predetermined combination, and an accumulated payout amount acquired in a free game. The credit amount display portion 20 displays the credit amount that the player currently possesses.
  • The cabinet 2 has an operation table 25 provided at a front face thereof, between the variable display portion 10B and the lower display portion 10C, and bulging out at the front side. On this operation table 25 are arranged various kinds of operation buttons 26, forming an operation unit that commands execution of the game. The buttons 26 include a BET button, a COLLECT button, a START button, a CASHOUT button and the like. The operation table 25 has a coin slot 27 adapted to accept coins, representing gaming values, inside the cabinet 2, and a bill slot 28 adapted to accept bills inside the cabinet 2.
  • The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment employs coins, bills or electronic value information (credit) corresponding to these, as gaming values. The gaming values applicable to the disclosure are not limited to those described above, and can include, for instance, medals, tokens, electronic money and tickets.
  • At a lowermost part of the cabinet 2, there is provided a coin tray 29 adapted to accept coins paid out from the hopper. Further, at a periphery of the cabinet 2 in the slot machine 1, there is arranged a light emitting portion 30 which lights up in a predetermined lighting fashion during a free game, or if a win occurs. Further, at a side face of the cabinet 2 is provided a speaker 31 for audio output.
  • Further, the slot machine 1 has a topper effect device 4 provided at an upper side of the cabinet 2. This topper effect device 4 has a rectangular board shape and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel with the upper liquid crystal panel 11A of the upper display portion 11A.
  • Next, a symbol display portion 12 provided in the main liquid crystal panel 11B and symbols 111 through 117 to be displayed on the symbol display portion 12 will be described based on FIG. 3 through FIG. 5. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a symbol display portion 12 in a slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 shows a symbol column arranged on each reel in a slot machine according to the first embodiment of the disclosure. FIG. 5 is a view showing a list of contents for various symbols and payouts which are used during a game and free game in a slot machine according to the first embodiment of the disclosure.
  • First, there will be described the symbol display portion 12 and symbols 111 through 117 displayed on the symbol display portion 12 during the execution of the base game.
  • As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display area 12 in the base game, according to the first embodiment, is constituted of five reels 13 through 17. The reels 13 through 17 have symbol display areas 32 through 46, each symbol display area respectively displaying three symbols when the respective rotating reels 13 through 17 are stopped. In the first embodiment, there are used one kind of wild symbol 111 and six kinds of scatter symbols (namely, “SUN” symbol 112, “THUNDER” symbol 113, “A” symbol 114, “K” symbol 115, “Q” symbol 116 and “J” symbol 117). When a game is started, the respective symbol display areas 32 through 46 each display one symbol (total fifteen symbols), as shown in FIG. 8. In the drawing, a dotted line is drawn to divide the respective symbol display areas 32 through 46, however, a configuration is possible where the dotted line is not shown.
  • Next, the symbol columns displayed in a scrolled manner with the rotation of the reels 13 through 17 at the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described.
  • As shown in FIG. 4, each of the reels 13 through 17 is comprised of wild symbol(s) 111, “SUN” symbol(s) 112, “THUNDER” symbol(s) 113, “A” symbol(s) 114, “K” symbol(s) 115, “Q” symbol(s) 116, and “J” symbol(s) 117, wherein those symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. It is to be noted that FIG. 4 partially illustrates the symbol column of the reel 13. Other reels 14 through 17 also have symbol columns such like the symbol column of the reel 13.
  • Regarding respective symbol columns on the reels 13 through 17, a code number is assigned to each of the symbols in order from top one and code numbers are used in a lottery process so as to determine symbols to be position in the symbol display areas 32 through 46.
  • Next, there will be described combinations determined with respective symbols 111 through 117 stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 12 by referring to FIG. 5.
  • A wild symbol 111 is substituted for any one of all the symbols if it is positioned in any one of the symbol display areas 38 through 46. If three wild symbols 111 are positioned in any three of the symbol display areas 38 through 46, 50 credits are paid as payout. If four wild symbols 111 are positioned in any four of the symbol display areas 38 through 46, 200 credits are paid as payout. If five wild symbols 111 are positioned in any five of the symbol display areas 38 through 46, 1000 credits are paid as payout. Additionally, if three or more of wild symbols 111 are positioned in any of the symbol display areas 38 through 46, free games will be executed the predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) as payout.
  • (1) If three “SUN” symbols 112 are positioned in any three of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 8 credits are paid as payout. If four “SUN” symbols 112 are positioned in any four of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 30 credits are paid as payout. If five “SUN” symbols 112 are positioned in any five of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 200 credits are paid as payout.
  • (2) If three “THUNDER” symbols 113 are positioned in any three of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 5 credits are paid as payout. If four “THUNDER” symbols 113 are positioned in any four of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 20 credits are paid as payout. If five “THUNDER” symbols 113 are positioned in any five of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, 150 credits are paid as payout.
  • (3) Similar to the cases of “SUN” symbol 112 and “THUNDER” symbol 113, if three or more “A” symbols 114, three or more “K” symbols 115, three or more “Q” symbols 116 and three or more “J” symbols 117 are positioned in any of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, credits shown in FIG. 5 are paid as payout.
  • It is to be noted that the payout table shown in FIG. 5 indicates payouts in case the bet amount placed at the beginning of a game is one. Therefore, in case the bet amount is two or more, there is paid out amount corresponding to the product of a payout multiplied by the bet amount.
  • In the first embodiment, only scatter symbols may constitute symbols and a winning combination may be established if the predetermined number or more of same kind of symbols are in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 irrespective of the pay line. In this case, a payout is awarded. A payout may also be awarded for a win according to a pay line. In that case, a payout may be awarded if the predetermined number or more of same kind of symbols are displayed along the pay line. Also, both a payout depending on the pay line and a payout irrespective of the pay line may be awarded.
  • Next, the internal configuration of the above-mentioned slot machine 1 will be described while referring to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the entire slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the slot machine 1 has a plurality of constituent elements arranged around a main control board 71 including a controller 51 that executes control programs that will be described later (FIG. 9 through FIG. 11). The main control board 71 has a controller 51, a random number generation circuit 55, a sampling circuit 56, a clock pulse generation circuit 57, a divider 58, an illumination effect driving circuit 61, a hopper driving circuit 63, a payout completion signal circuit 65 and a display portion driving circuit 67.
  • The controller 51 has a main CPU 52, a RAM 53 and a ROM 54. The main CPU 52 operates in accordance with the programs stored in the ROM 54 and performs signal input and output with respect to the other constituent elements through an I/O port 59. Specifically, the main CPU 53 controls the operation of the entire slot machine 1. The RAM 53 stores data and programs to be used when the main CPU 52 is operating. For instance, the RAM 53 temporarily retains the random number values which have been sampled by the sampling circuit 56 after the game has started. The RAM 53 stores code numbers corresponding to the respective reels 13 through 17. The ROM 54 stores various types of programs that will be executed by the main CPU 52, as well as permanent data.
  • More particularly, the programs stored in the ROM 54 include game programs and game system programs (hereinafter referred to as game programs or the like). Further, the game programs include lottery programs as will be described later.
  • There is used a first lottery program to determine the code numbers for the respective reels 13 through 17 corresponding to the respective symbols which are to be repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B. This first lottery program includes symbol weighing data for each of the respective five reels 13 through 17. The symbol weighing data shows correspondence relationship between the respective code numbers and one or a plurality of random number values within a predetermined number value range (for instance, 0 through 255). The probability of lottery with respect to each symbol is set by associating one or a plurality of random number values to one code number. The random number values are drawn by lottery and symbol which have been finally identified from the random number values are repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B.
  • The first lottery program for determining the symbols to be positioned may also employ weighing data in which the predetermined random number range is associated with the symbol combination. In this case, first, the symbol combination is selected by lottery based on the lottery program, and thereafter, the symbol combination thus determined is repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B.
  • There is used a second lottery program to select specific symbol display area(s) in a free game from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46. This second lottery program includes data (table) concerning relationship between each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 and one or a plurality of random number values within a predetermined number value range (for instance, 0 through 255). The random number values are drawn by lottery and one or more symbol display areas to be designated as specific symbol display are(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46.
  • The random number generation circuit 55 operates in accordance with the commands from the main CPU 52 and generates random numbers within a predetermined range. The sampling circuit 56 selects, by lottery, an arbitrary random number from the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 55 in response to a command from the main CPU 52. At the same time, the sampling circuit 56 inputs the random number thus selected to the main CPU 52. The clock pulse generation circuit 57 generates a reference clock for causing the main CPU 52 to operate. The divider 58 inputs a signal obtained by dividing the reference clock by a constant frequency to the main CPU 52.
  • The main control board 71 is connected to the touch panel 18. The touch panel 18 is arranged at a front face of the main liquid crystal panel 11B and is adapted to identify a coordinate position of the portion that was touched by the player. Specifically, the touch panel 18 can discriminate the portion that the player has touched, and in what direction the touched portion was moved based on the coordinate position information that was thus identified. A signal in accordance with the above discrimination is then inputted to the main CPU 52 through the I/O port 59.
  • The main control board 71 is connected to the operation buttons 26, including a START button for commanding execution of a game, a COLLECT button, a BET button and the like. Accordingly, a signal in accordance with a depression operation of these buttons is inputted to the main CPU 52 through the I/O port 59.
  • The illumination effect driving circuit 61 outputs an effect signal for causing the light emitting portion 30 and the topper effect device 4 as mentioned above to perform illumination effects. The topper effect device 4 is connected in series with the illumination effect driving circuit 61 through the light emitting portion 30.
  • The hopper driving circuit 63 drives the hopper 64 under the control of the main CPU 52. As a result, the hopper 64 carries out an operation to payout coins to the coin tray 29. The payout completion signal circuit 65 receives coin amount value data from the coin detecting portion 66 to which it is connected. Then, when the received coin amount value has reached the set coin amount value, the payout completion signal circuit 65 inputs a signal that notifies the completion of coin payout to the main CPU 52. The coin detecting portion 66 detects the number of coins that were paid out by the hopper 64 and then inputs coin amount value data showing the amount of coins that was detected to the payout completion signal circuit 65. The display portion driving circuit 67 controls the display operation of the respective display portions including the reels 13 through 17, a payout amount display portion 19 and the credit amount display portion 20 and the like.
  • The main control board 71 is connected to the sub-control board 72. As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 72 carries out display control of the upper liquid crystal panel 11A in the upper display portion 10A and the main liquid crystal panel 11B in the variable display portion 10B, as well as output control of the audio outputted by the speaker 31, based on the commands received from the main control board 71. This sub-control board 72 is constituted on a separate circuit board from the circuit board that constitutes the main control board 71. The sub-control board 72 has a micro computer (hereinafter referred to as “sub-micro computer”) 73 which is provided as a main constituting element. Then, the sub-control board 72 has a sound source IC 78, a power amplifier 79, and an image control circuit 81.
  • The sub-micro computer 73 has a sub-CPU 74, a program ROM 75, a work RAM 76 and I/ O ports 77 and 80. Although the sub-control board 72 does not have a clock pulse generation circuit, a divider, a random number generation circuit and a sampling circuit, it is constituted so as to execute sampling of random numbers based on an operation program of the sub-CPU 74. The program ROM 75 stores a control program to be executed by the sub-CPU 74. The work RAM 76 is constituted as a temporary memory to be used by the sub CPU 74 in executing the control program.
  • The image control circuit 81 has an image control CPU 82, an image control work RAM 83, an image control program ROM 84, an image ROM 86, a video RAM 87 and an image control IC 88. The image control CPU 82 determines the image to be displayed on the upper liquid crystal panel 11A and the main liquid crystal panel 11B based on the parameters set in the sub-micro computer 73 and the image control programs stored in the image control program ROM 84. For instance, the upper liquid crystal panel 11A displays a payout table and a help screen. The main liquid crystal panel 11B carries out scrolled display and stopped display of the respective symbols 111 through 117 concurrent with the rotation of the reels 13 through 17 in a base game and free game, with respect to the symbol display portion 12.
  • The image control program ROM 84 stores an image control program and various types of selection tables relating to display on the upper liquid crystal panel 11A and the main liquid crystal panel 11B. The image control work RAM 83 functions as a temporary memory to be used in execution of the image control program in the image control CPU 82. The image control IC 88 forms an image in accordance with the contents determined by the image control CPU 82 and then outputs the image thus formed to the upper liquid crystal panel 11A and the main liquid crystal panel 11B.
  • The image ROM 86 stores dot data for forming an image. The video RAM 87 functions as a temporary memory to be used by the image control IC 88 in forming an image.
  • Next, the base game and the free game which are carried out in the slot machine 1 having the above configuration will be described by referring to FIG. 8. First, the base game will be described. The base game is a slot game in which a predetermined symbol combination is repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B, through the respective reels 13 through 17. More specifically, the player operates the operation button 26 to set the bet amount, and when he/she depresses the START button, a lottery process is executed to select, by lottery, the symbols that will be positioned in the symbol display portion 12. After the start button has been depressed and the reels 13 through 17 start rotating following the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the symbol columns are displayed in a scrolled manner (refer to the upper one in FIG. 8). On the reels 13 through 17 there are arranged the respective symbols 21 through 24 in an alignment shown in FIG. 4. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, a total of fifteen symbols will be sequentially stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 32 through 46, as shown at the lower one in FIG. 8.
  • Here, in the base game, various kinds of winning combinations are determined in advance based on the respective symbol combination repositioned in the main liquid crystal panel 11B (see FIG. 5). If a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is realized through the symbols repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46, a gaming value obtained by multiplying the payout corresponding to the winning combination thus established by the bet amount is awarded to the player.
  • On the other hand, the free game carried out in the slot machine executed after the game mode has switched from the base game in a case where a winning combination including three or more of wild symbols 111 has been positioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46. After the game has been successively carried out by a predetermined number of times (for instance, five times), the free game terminates and the game mode switches again to the base game. With respect to the procedure of the game, the free game is the same as the base game, except that in the free game, gaming values (credits) corresponding to the bet amount are not consumed at the start of the game, and the game is continuously carried out automatically without requiring the player to operate the operation button 26.
  • However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in case wild symbol(s) is/are repositioned in specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected by a lottery in a free game, the wild symbol(s) repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • The details of the free game will be described by referring to FIG. 1.
  • When a free game is started, a lottery process is executed by using random number values so as to randomly select a predetermined number of specific symbol display are(s) from among the symbol display areas 36 through 46.
  • Next, each of the reels 13 through 17 starts rotating and each of their symbol columns is displayed in a scrolled manner. While the symbol columns are being scrolled, frames 101 corresponding to the predetermined number of specific symbol display areas randomly selected through the lottery are displayed on the symbol display portion 12. The uppermost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that five symbol display areas 33, 35, 39, 43 and 45 are selected as specific symbol display areas.
  • When a predetermined period of time has lapsed, the reels 13 through 17 sequentially stop rotating in turn, starting from the left, so as to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46. In case symbols repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 realizes a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, a payout associated with the realized winning combination is awarded to the player.
  • In case the reels 13 through 17 stop rotating to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 and wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned within frame(s) 101 (i.e., specific symbol display area), the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). The second-uppermost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that two wild symbols 111 are repositioned in the symbol display areas 33 and 45 which are specific symbol display areas. Accordingly, in the subsequent free game(s), the two wild symbols 111 will remain positioned in the symbol display areas 33 and 45 until remaining free games terminate.
  • Accordingly, when a new game constituting the free game is started, a lottery process is executed again by using random number values to randomly select specific symbol display area(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46.
  • After that, each of the reels 13 through 17 starts rotating and each of their symbol columns is displayed in a scrolled manner. However, the wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state will not be changed. The second-bottommost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that symbol columns are being displayed in a scrolled manner in each of the symbol display areas other than the symbol display areas 33 and 45 in which the wild symbols 111 have been placed in a hold state.
  • After that, the frames 101 indicating specific symbol display areas randomly selected though the lottery are displayed on the symbol display portion 12. For instance, the example at the second-bottommost in FIG. 1 shows that six symbol display areas 36, 37, 39, 40, 42 and 43 are selected as specific symbol display areas.
  • When a predetermined period of time has lapsed, the reels 13 through 17 sequentially stop rotating in turn, starting from the left, so as to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas other than the ones where the wild symbols 111 have been displayed. For instance, in case of the bottommost in FIG. 1, symbols are repositioned in symbol display areas other than the symbol display areas 33 and 45. If a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is realized through the symbols repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46, a payout corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.
  • In case wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned within frame(s) 101, the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). The bottommost illustration in FIG. 1 shows an example that a wild symbol 111 is repositioned in the symbol display area 37 which is a specific symbol display area. Accordingly, in the subsequent free game(s), the three wild symbols 111 will remain repositioned in the symbol display areas 33, 37 and 45 until remaining free games terminate.
  • As described, as games in a free game advance, the number of wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state may increase gradually, whereby player's expectancy to win a high payout is enhanced.
  • Next, a main control program to be executed in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail while referring to the drawings. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a main control program.
  • First, when the power switch is turned on (upon power on), the main control board 71 activates the sub-control board 72 and the controller 51 executes an initial setting process at step (hereinafter abbreviated as S) 1. In the initial setting process, the main CPU 52 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 54 and expands the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS in the RAM 53. In executing the BIOS that was expanded in the RAM 53, the main CPU 52 carries out a diagnosis and initialization of the different types of peripheral devices. Further, the main CPU 52 writes the game programs and the like from the ROM 54 into the RAM 53 to acquire payout rate setting data and country identification information. While executing the initial setting process, the main CPU 52 also carries out an authentication process with respect to each program.
  • Then, at S2, the main CPU 52 sequentially reads the game programs and the like from the RAM 53 and executes these programs to carry out a main game process. The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment carries out the game by executing this main game process. The main game process is repeatedly executed while power is supplied to the slot machine 1.
  • Next, a sub-process of the main game process at the above-described S2 will now be described based on FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of a main game process program to be executed in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The programs shown in the flow charts at FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 as will be described later are stored in the ROM 54 and RAM 53 provided in the slot machine 1 and are executed in the main CPU 52.
  • As shown in FIG. 10, the main CPU 52 first executes a start acceptance process at S11. In the start acceptance process, the player inserts coins and places a bet using the BET button from amongst the operation buttons 26.
  • At S12, the main CPU 52 determines whether or not the start button from amongst the operation buttons 26 has been depressed. This determination is carried out based on the signal inputted to the main CPU 52 in response to depression of the start button. Here, if the start button has not been depressed (S12: NO), the flow returns to the start acceptance process (S11). As a result, the player can carry out an operation to correct, etc. the bet amount. Alternatively, if the start button has been depressed (S12: YES), the main CPU 52 subtracts the bet amount set based on the above-described bet operation from the credit amount that the player currently possesses and at the same time stores the result as bet information in the RAM 53.
  • At S13, the main CPU 52 executes a symbol lottery process for the base game. In this symbol lottery process, the main CPU 52 selects, by lottery, the symbols to be positioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B. More specifically, the main CPU 52 executes the first lottery program stored in the RAM 53, thereby sampling a random number value from a number value range within a predetermined random number value range. The main CPU 52 determines the respective fifteen symbols (specifically, stop position of reels 13 through 17), from among the wild symbols 111 and the six kinds of scatter symbols 112 through 117, that will be repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46, based on the sampled random number value and the symbol weighing data.
  • Next, at S14, the main CPU 52 carries out a reel rotation process. Namely, the reels 13 through 17 start rotating and the symbol columns positioned in the respective reels 13 through 17 are displayed in a scrolled manner at a predetermined speed. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the rotating reels 13 through 17 are stopped in turn, starting from the left, and one symbol is respectively displayed in each of symbol display areas 32 through 46 (refer to FIG. 8). Thus, the symbol combination determined at the above-mentioned S13 is repositioned in the symbol display areas 32 through 46 of the main liquid crystal panel 11B.
  • Then, at S15, the main CPU 52 carries out a winning determination process to determine whether the symbol combination positioned in the main liquid crystal panel 11B is any of the winning combinations for which a payout is awarded. This determination is carried out based on the code numbers of the respective reels 13 through 17 stored in the RAM 53.
  • If it is determined, at the above-mentioned S15 that the winning combination has been established (S16: YES), the flow shifts to S17. Alternatively, if it is determined that the winning combination has not been established (S16: NO), the main game process is ended. The processes following S11 are again carried out in a case a game is next started.
  • At S17, the main CPU 52 calculates a payout based on the winning combination thus established. For instance, if a predetermined number or more of the same kind of symbols have been positioned, as shown in FIG. 5, a payout is calculated in accordance with the kind of symbol and the number of positioned symbols.
  • Next, at S18, the main CPU 52 notifies the player by displaying the kind of the winning combination thus established and the contents of the payout with respect to the main liquid crystal panel 11B. For instance, if three wild symbols 111 and three “A” symbols 114 have been indicated, a message “WIN 53” and a message “Go Free Game” are displayed, as shown in FIG. 8. The former message notifies that 53 credits will be paid out as a payout, and the latter message notifies that the game mode shifts to a free game.
  • Next, at S19, the main CPU 52 determines whether or not the trigger for shifting to the free game has been established. More specifically, if the winning combination including three wild symbols 111 has been established, a determination is made that the trigger for shifting to the free game has been established.
  • As a result, if it is determined that the free-game shift trigger has been established (S19: YES), the value for the payout which will be awarded at present is stored (S20), and then, the flow shifts to the free game process (FIG. 11) as will be described later (S21). The payout which is stored at the above-described S20 will be paid out at a payout process (S22) altogether with other payouts. Alternatively, if it is determined that the free-game shift trigger is not established (S19: NO), the flow shifts to S22.
  • At S22, the main CPU 52 awards a payout to the player in accordance with the winning combination established in the current game, based on the calculation result of the above-described S17. At this time, the payout can be made using coins corresponding to the credit amount (1 credit corresponds to 1 coin), and the payout can be made by using bar-code attached tickets, in response to the depression of the CASHOUT button from among the operation buttons 26. If a free game has been carried out, a payout which was accumulated during the free game is paid out altogether to the player.
  • Next, the sub-process for the free game process at the above S21 will be described based on FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flow chart of a sub-process program for the free game process in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • First, at S31, the main CPU 52 designates specific symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46. To be more specific, the main CPU 52 first executes the second lottery program stored in the RAM 53 for sampling random number values from the predetermined number value range. Next, the main CPU 52 randomly selects a predetermined number of symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 as specific symbol display areas based on the sampled random number values and a not-shown table. Then, the CPU 52 designate the selected symbol display areas as specific symbol display areas.
  • Next, at S32, the main CPU 52 executes a symbol lottery process for the free game in which a symbol to be positioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B is selected by lottery. The substantial processing method of the lottery process is similar to the symbol lottery process for the base game at the above S13, therefore a detailed description is omitted.
  • Next, at S33, the main CPU 52 carries out a reel rotation process. Specifically, the reels 13 through 17 start rotating and the respective symbol columns positioned in the respective reels 13 through 17 are displayed in a scrolled manner at a predetermined speed.
  • At S34, the main CPU 52 displays frames 101 (refer to FIG. 1) on the symbol display portion 12 so as to specify specific symbol display areas designated at S1.
  • At S35, the main CPU 52 stops rotation of the reels 13 through 17 in turn, starting from the left, and then displays a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46, after the lapse of a predetermined period of time. As a result, the symbol combination determined at the above-mentioned S32 is displayed on the symbol display areas 32 through 46 of the liquid crystal panel 11B in a matrix. However, in case there is(are) symbol display area(s) where wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) placed in a hold state through S42 to be described later, the CPU 52 repositions symbols in symbol display areas other than the one(s) where the wild symbol(s) 11 is(are) placed in a hold state.
  • Next, at S36, the main CPU 52 carries out a winning determination process in which a determination is made whether or not the symbol combination repositioned on the main liquid crystal panel 11B is any of the winning combinations for which any of the payout is awarded. In case there is(are) symbol display area(s) where wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) placed in a hold state, the main CPU 52 determines whether or not a symbol combination including the wild symbol(s) 111 establishes any of the winning combinations for which any of the payout is awarded.
  • If it is determined at S36, that the winning combination has been established (S37: YES), the flow shifts to S38. Alternatively, if it is determined that the winning combination has not been established (S37: NO), the flow shifts to S41.
  • At S38, the main CPU 52 calculates the payout based on the winning combination thus established. For instance, if predetermined number of more of the same kind of symbols have been positioned, as shown in FIG. 5, a payout is calculated in accordance with the kind symbol and the number of positioned symbols. In case there is(are) wild symbol(s) 111 placed in a hold state in symbol display area(s), the main CPU calculates a payout based on a symbol combination including the wild symbol(s) 111 placed in a hold state in the symbol display area(s).
  • Next, at S39, the main CPU 52 sends a notification to the player by displaying the kind of the established winning combination and the contents of the payout on the main liquid crystal panel 11B.
  • Next, at S40, the main CPU 52 accumulatively stores a payout corresponding to the winning combination established in the current game in the RAM 53, based on the calculation results at the above-described S38. The payout thus stored is awarded to the player altogether, after the free game ends (S22).
  • Nest, at S41, the main CPU 52 stops rotation of the reels 13 through 17 to reposition a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46 and determine judges whether or not wild symbol(s) 111 has(have) been positioned within frame(s) 101 (i.e., specific symbol display area(s)).
  • If it is determined that wild symbol(s) 111 has(have) been positioned in specific symbol display area(s) (S41: YES), the flow shifts to S42. Alternatively, if it is determined that wild symbol(s) 111 has(have) not been positioned in specific symbol display area(s) (S41: NO), the flow shift to S 43.
  • At S42, the main CPU 52 places and maintains the wild symbol(s) 111 positioned in the specific symbol display area(s) in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). The wild symbol(s) once place in a hold state will remain positioned in the specific symbol display area(s) until remaining free games terminate. continuously be placed.
  • Then, at S43, the main CPU 52 determines whether or not the free game completion condition has been satisfied. The free game completion condition in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes five times of free-game execution after shifting to the free game.
  • If it is determined that the free game completion condition has been satisfied (S43: YES), the flow shifts to S44. Alternatively, if it is determined that the free game completion condition is not satisfied (S43: NO), the flow returns to S31 at which the free game is then executed.
  • At S44, the main CPU 52 cancels the hold state of the wild symbol(s) 111 placed as so at S42. After the game mode is switched from the free game mode to the base game mode, the flow shifts to S22.
  • As explained above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, if a free-game shift trigger is established in a base game (S19:YES), a free game is executed (S21). When the free game is started, the main CPU 52 randomly designates a predetermined number of specific symbol display areas from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 (S31). Subsequently, the main CPU 52 displays frames 111 for specifying the predetermined number of specific symbol display areas thus designated on the symbol display portion 12 while symbol columns are being scrolled (S34). After that, the reels 13 through 17 stop rotating to position a symbol in each of the symbol display areas 32 through 46. If wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s), the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in the specific symbol display area(s) will placed and maintained in a hold state thereat in subsequent free game(s) (S42). In the subsequent free game(s), symbols will be repositioned in symbol display areas other than one(s) in which the wild symbol(s) has/have been placed in a hold state (S35). Thereby, the contents of games are made visually easy for the player to understand and the sense of expectancy of the player for a free game is improved. As games in a free game advance, the number of wild symbols 111 placed in a hold state may increase gradually. Thereby, it makes it possible to provide a game which attracts the player who expects to win a high payout is enhanced.
  • Furthermore, the number of specific symbol display areas and locations thereof are randomly selected for each game through a lottery process. Therefore the game will not go monotonous and entertainment characteristics of the slot machine can be improved.
  • The disclosure is not limited to the above-described embodiment and various modification and alternations can be made there to without departing from the scope of the disclosure.
  • For instance, in the first embodiment, the conditions for shifting to the free game include establishment of a winning combination including a predetermined number of wild symbols 111. However, the conditions for shifting to the free game may also include other conditions. For instance, such condition may occur unexpectedly, like a mystery.
  • Also, the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that, if wild symbol(s) 111 is(are) repositioned in specific symbol display area(s), the wild symbol(s) 111 repositioned in specific symbol display area(s) will be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s). However, symbols other than the wild symbol 111 may be the symbol to be placed in a hold state. For instance, if a “SUN” symbol 112 or a “THUNDER” symbol 113 is repositioned in a specific symbol display area, the “SUN” symbol 112 or the “THUNDER” symbol 113 repositioned in the specific symbol display area may be placed and maintained in a hold state in subsequent free game(s).
  • Also, the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that the process to designate specific symbol display area(s) from among the symbol display areas 32 through 46 based on a lottery result (S31) for each game which constitutes the free game. However, S31 may be executed for every certain number of games (e.g. every two games or every three games).
  • Also, the first embodiment is configured in such a manner that the wild symbol 111 once placed in a hold state in a symbol display area will remain at the symbol display area until remaining free games terminate. However, such wild symbol 111 may be maintained in a hold state only in a predetermined number of free games (e.g., two games).
  • The disclosure is not limited to video reels only, but is also applicable with respect to slot machines using mechanical reels. For instance, the slot machine 201 shown in FIG. 12 is a so-called hybrid-type slot machine having a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel installed at a front face of the plurality of mechanical reels which are rotatably supported, and a game is carried out therein by displaying images of the respective symbols positioned on the outer periphery of the mechanical reels, through the transparent liquid crystal panel.
  • The slot machine 201 has three reels, namely, a left reel 203, a center reel 204 and a right reel 205 which are rotatably supported. The respective reels 203 through 205 have symbol columns drawn on their outer periphery, each symbol column being made up of a plurality of symbols. Further, the respective reels 203 through 205 have, at a front side thereof, a main liquid crystal panel 202 which is made up of a heretofore known transparent liquid crystal panel provided in the main door. Here, the main liquid crystal panel 202 has three display windows 206, 207, and 208 formed therein, the back faces thereof being visible.
  • In the above-described slot machine 201, the base game and the free game may be carried out employing the reels 203 through 205. Furthermore, a frame for designating a specific symbol display area is displayed on the main liquid crystal panel 20. Furthermore, in case a wild symbol 111 is repositioned in a specific symbol display area, the wild symbol 111 will be continuously displayed in the location corresponding to the specific symbol display area in which the wild symbol has been repositioned until remaining free game terminate.
  • It is to be note that aspects of the disclosure may be realized as a playing method for executing the above-described processes and may be realized in a form of a program for executing the playing method with a computer and a recording medium in which said program is recorded.
  • Second Embodiment
  • Hereinafter, a gaming machine related to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment will be described in detail based on an embodiment embodying a slot machine with reference to drawings.
  • The slot machine 1001 of the embodiment includes image display devices such as the liquid crystal display and the like, the game is executed by displaying the images of various symbols on the image display device. In other words, the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as a video slot machine.
  • Also, the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as hybrid-type slot machine which is constructed from mechanical reels and a transparent liquid display device provided in front of the mechanic reels. Also, the slot machine 1001 of the embodiment can be implemented as a mechanical slot machine having mechanical reels.
  • In the following description, a slot machine using video reels will mainly be described. However, one or more aspects of the disclosure may also be applied to a slot machine using mechanical reels as much as possible.
  • In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, additional payout amount is determined in a free game process (S1041). Also, when the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S1043: YES), an outcome based on the game result of the free games will be provided to the player (S1044). Thereafter, a symbol combination stopped on the symbol display portions is determined based on the determined payout amount (S1045). After that, reels spin on reel display portions, and reels are stopped so that the combination of symbols becomes the determined symbol combination (S1047). Then, an additional payout amount which has been determined is displayed (S1048). And, the determined additional payout amount is paid out (S1049).
  • The slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment will be explained in detail with reference with the drawing. FIG. 14 shows an external appearance of the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment.
  • The slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is an upright type slot machine which is provided in a game hall such as the casino. Here, it is to be noted that the exterior appearance of the slot machine 1001 shown in FIG. 14 is merely one example in the disclosure, and one or more aspects of the disclosure is not limited to the exterior appearance.
  • The slot machine 1001 includes a cabinet 1002. The cabinet 1002 is a housing portion which houses the electric and mechanic components for executing the predetermined gaming modes in the slot machine 1001.
  • The slot machine 1001 includes an upper display 1010A, a main display 1010B and a lower display 1010C at the front side of the cabinet 1002 to display various gaming information. The upper display 1010A is arranged on the upper portion of the cabinet 1002, the main display 1010B is arranged on the middle portion of the cabinet 1002 and the lower display 1010C is arranged on the lower portion of the cabinet 1002.
  • The upper display 1010A is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. The effect images, the payout table in the game, the game rules and the like are displayed on the upper display 1010A.
  • The main display 1010B is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. The main display 1010B includes five columns of reel display portions 1101 to 1105, as shown in FIG. 15. On each of the reel display portions, variable display and stop display of the symbol rows are executed. Three symbols are displayed on each of the reel display portions 1101 to 1105. In other words, symbols are displayed in a 3×5 matrix shape on the main display 1010B, as shown in FIG. 16. The reel display portions 1101 to 1105 include symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C. The number of the reels and the number of the displayed symbols on respective reel display portions are variable.
  • The image effect is made on the main display 1010B based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount in the free game, as will described later.
  • A touch panel 1018 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal panel on the main display 1010B. A player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 1018. Also, a payout amount display portion 1005 and a credit number display portion 1006 are provided on the main display 1010B. The display positions of the payout amount display portion 1005 and the credit number display portion 1006 are arranged arbitrarily. For example, the payout amount display portion 1005 and the credit number display portion 1006 may be arranged on the right lower portion of the main display 1010B. Also, a bet number display portion which displays the bet number may also be provided. The payout amount (namely, the payout amount when a predetermined number of predetermined symbols are displayed in the base game and the free game) provided to the player may be displayed on the payout amount display portion 1005. And, the credit number which is presently owned by the player is displayed on the credit number display portion 1006.
  • Also, a background portion 1121 is arranged on the main display 1010B. Here, the background portion 1121 is an area on the main display 1010B other than the reel display portions 1101 through 1105, the payout display portion 1005, and credit number display portion 1006.
  • The upper display 1010A and the main display 1010B, for example, are constructed from the liquid crystal panel as described above. However, one or more aspects of the disclosure are not limited to the liquid crystal panel. In other words, either display portion may also be the CRT display, the plasma display, the LED display, and the other well-known display device.
  • The lower display 1010C is arranged on the lower portion of the cabinet 1002, and is constructed from a plastic panel. The drawings of the characters relating to the gaming machine, the name of the gaming machine and the like are drawn on the lower display 1010C, and are lit up by the back lights. The lower display 1010C may also be the liquid crystal panel, the CRT display, the plasma display, the LED display, and the other well-known display device.
  • Also, the main display 1010B may also be configured as a hybrid type which is constructed from a mechanical reel and a transparent liquid crystal display device arranged in front of the mechanical reel. As a result, the symbols drawn on the mechanical reel may be visible via the transparent liquid crystal display device. Display windows the number of which is equal to that of the mechanical reels are arranged on the transparent liquid crystal display device, so that the symbols drawn on the mechanical reels may be visible via the display windows. The slot machine using video reels will be mainly described in the below description, however, one or more aspects of the disclosure may also be applied to the slot machines using the mechanical reels as much as possible. When mechanical reels are used, the spin and the stop of the mechanical reels are controlled by a motor which is not shown.
  • An operation table 1025 is arranged in front of the cabinet 1002. The operation table 1025 is arranged so as to extend forward between the main display 1010B and the lower display 1010C. Plural types of operation buttons 1026 are provided on the operation table 1025. The operation buttons 1026 include a BET button, a collect button, a start button, a CASHOUT button and the like. A coin insertion slot 1027 and a bill insertion slot 1028 are arranged on the operation table 1025. The coin insertion slot 1027 is used to receive coins which are the gaming media to the cabinet 1002. The bill insertion slot 1028 is used to receive the bills to the cabinet 1002.
  • Here, coins, bills or electronic value (credits) which are equivalent to coins or bills are used as the gaming media in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment. However, the gaming media applicable in the present disclosure are not limited to coins, bills or electronic value. For example, the gaming media may also be medals, tokens, electric moneys, and tickets.
  • A coin tray 1029 is provided at the bottommost of the cabinet 1002. The coin tray 1029 is used to receive the coins paid out by a hopper 1064. A light emitting portion 1030 is provided around the cabinet 1002 of the slot machine 1001. The light emitting portion 1030 is lighted up in a predetermined lighting pattern when the player wins the game or during the event game. A speaker 1031 is provided on the side surface of the cabinet 1002. The speaker 1031 outputs sound in accordance with the progressing of the game.
  • The topper effect device 4 has a rectangular board shape, and is arranged almost parallel to the upper display 1010A.
  • Next, the internal constitution of the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to the drawing. FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are block diagrams showing the internal constitution of the slot machine 1001.
  • As shown in FIG. 17, the slot machine 1001 includes plural constitution elements around the main control board 1071.
  • A controller 1041 includes a main CPU 1042, a ROM 1043, and a RAM 1044. The main CPU 1042 inputs or outputs signals with other constitution elements via I/O port 1049, and executes the programs stored in the ROM 1043. Herewith, the main CPU 1042 serves as a control center of the slot machine 1001. The RAM 1044 stores temporarily the data and the programs when the main CPU 1042 runs. For example, the RAM 1044 temporarily stores the random number value sampled by a sampling circuit 1046 to be described later. And the identification number of the slot machine 1001 is stored in the ROM 1043 or the RAM 1044. The ROM 1043 stores the programs executed by the main CPU 1042 and the permanent data.
  • The main control board 1071 includes a random number generation circuit 1045, a sampling circuit 1046, a clock pulse generation circuit 1047, and a frequency divider 1048.
  • The random number generation circuit 1045 operates based on the instruction of the main CPU 1042, and generates a predetermined range of random numbers. The sampling circuit 1046 extracts an arbitrary random number from the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 1045 based on the instruction of the main CPU 1042. The sampling circuit 1046 inputs the extracted random number to the main CPU 1042. The clock pulse generation circuit 1047 generates a basic clock to run the main CPU 1042. The frequency divider 1048 divides the basic clock in a predetermined frequency, and inputs the divided signals to the main CPU 1042.
  • The touch panel 1018 is connected to the main control board 1071. The touch panel 1018 may specify the coordinate position of the part to which the player touches. The touch panel 1018 may determine the portion to which the player touches based on the specified coordinate position information, and determines the direction to which the touched place moves. The touch panel 1018 inputs the signal corresponding to the determination result via the I/O port 1049 to the main CPU 1042.
  • The operation buttons 1026 are connected to the main control board 1071. As described above, the operation buttons 1026 include the start button, the collect button, the BET button and the like to instruct the execution of the game. When each button included in the operation buttons 1026 is pressed, the operation signal is inputted to the main CPU 1042 via the I/O port 1049.
  • The main control board 1071 also includes an illumination effect driving circuit 1061, a hopper driving circuit 1063, a payout completion signal circuit 1065 and a display portion driving circuit 1067.
  • The illumination effect driving circuit 1061 outputs effect signals to the above-mentioned light emitting portion 1030 and the topper effect device 1004. And the topper effect device 1004 is serially connected to the illumination effect driving circuit 1061 through light emitting portions 1030. When the effect signal is inputted, the light emitting portions 1030 and the topper effect device 1004 emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern. As a result, the slot machine 1001 executes light emitting effect in accordance with the progressing of the game.
  • The hopper driving circuit 1063 drives the hopper 1064 based on the control of the main CPU 1042. The hopper 1064 executes the payout of coins, and thereby, coins are paid out to the coin tray 1029. The display portion driving circuit 1067 executes the display control of various display portions such as the payout amount display portion 1005, the credit number display portion 1006 and the like.
  • A coin detecting portion 1066 is connected to the payout completion signal circuit 1065. The coin detecting portion 1066 calculates the number of the coins paid out by the hopper 1064. The coin detecting portion 1066 inputs the data of the calculated number of coins to the payout completion signal circuit 1065. The payout completion signal circuit 1065 determines whether the predetermined number of coins is paid out based on the data of the number of coins input by the coin detecting portion 1066. When the coins with the predetermined number are all paid out, the signal indicating the completion of the coins is inputted to the main CPU 1042 by the payout completion signal circuit 1065.
  • A sub-control board 1072 is connected to the main control board 1071. The sub-control board 1072 is formed on a circuit board different from that of the main control board 1071. The display control of the upper display 1010A, the main display 1010B and the output control of sound by the speaker 1031 are executed by the sub-control board 1072, based on the commands inputted from the main control board 1071.
  • As shown in FIG. 18, the sub-control board 1072 includes a microcomputer 1073 (termed as “sub-microcomputer” hereinafter) as a main constitution element. The sub-microcomputer 1073 includes a sub-CPU 1074, a program ROM 1075, a work RAM 1076, an IN port 1077 and an OUT port 1080. The sub-CPU 1074 executes the control operations based on the control orders (commands) sent from the main control board 1071. The program ROM 1075 stores the control programs executed by the sub-CPU 1074. The work RAM 1076 is configured as a temporary storing device when the above control programs are executed by the sub-CPU 1074.
  • The sub-control board 1072 executes the random number sampling on the running program of the sub-CPU 1074. As a result, the sub-control board 1072 may execute the same processes as the processes executed by the clock pulse generation circuit 1047, the frequency divider 1048, the random number generation circuit 1045, and the sampling circuit 1046 in the main control board 1071.
  • The sub-control board 1072 includes a sound source IC 1078, a power amplifier 1079 and an image control circuit 1081. The sound source IC 1078 controls the sound output from the speaker 1031. The power amplifier 1079 is used as an amplifier for the output of the sound. And the image control circuit 1081 is running as the display control device of the upper display 1010A and the main display 1010B.
  • The image control circuit 1081 includes an image control CPU 1082, an image control work RAM 1083, an image control program ROM 1084, an image ROM 1086, a video RAM 1087 and an image control IC 1088. The image control CPU 1082 determines the images displayed on the upper display 1010A and the main display 1010B based on the parameters set by the sub-microcomputer 1073 and the image control programs.
  • The image control programs regarding to the display of the upper display 1010A and the main display 1010B and a variety of the selection tables are stored in the image control program ROM 1084. The image control work RAM 1083 serves as a temporary storing device when the image control programs are executed by the image control CPU 1082. IN port 1085 is connected to the OUT port 1080. Images corresponding to the content determined by the image control CPU 1082 are formed by the image control IC 1088, and are output to the upper display 1010A and the main display 1010B. The dot data used to form images are stored in the image ROM 1086. The video RAM 1087 serves as a temporary storing device when the images are formed by the image control IC 1088.
  • Here, the internal constitution described above is merely one example, and one or more aspects of the disclosure are not limited to the internal constitution. For example, the internal constitution may also be configured by detachably mount a memory card and/or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device) so as to read out the necessary information from the memory card and/or PLD.
  • Next, symbols which are variably displayed on the symbol display portion will be described with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 shows one example of a type of symbols displayed in the reel which are variably displayed on the symbol display portion.
  • The symbols used in the embodiment include KING symbol 1051A, QUEEN symbol 1051B, JACK symbol 1051C, ACE symbol 1051D, TEN symbol 1051E, BELL symbol 1051F, THUNDER symbol 1051G, and STAR symbol 1051H.
  • The number of the symbols displayed on one reel may be determined arbitrarily. Also, the types of to-be displayed symbols may be determined arbitrarily.
  • FIG. 20 shows one example of a reel which is variably displayed on each reel display portion. As shown in FIG. 20, the symbols shown in FIG. 19 are displayed on the reel in a predetermined sequence.
  • The sequence of symbols shown in FIG. 20 is merely one example, and the sequence of the symbols may be set appropriately.
  • Different reels may be used in respective reel display portions. Each reel display portion may include plural reels, and the reel may be set to be selectable through the payout ratio which is set.
  • Next, the game executed in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment will be described. The games executed in the embodiment include two types of game mode. These game modes are a base game and a free game.
  • First, the base game will be described. In the base game, a winning combination is determined based on the number of the same symbols displayed on each of the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C of the main display 1010B, and an award corresponding to the winning combination is provided.
  • When the player sets bet amount by operating the BET button and presses the start button, reel rows start spinning on their respective display portions 1101 to 1105 in response to the pressing of the start button. Thereby, symbol rows displayed on the reel rows are scrolled from up to down on their respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 as shown in FIG. 21. The reel rows are stopped and displayed on their respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 when a predetermined time has passed. In the meantime, a part of the symbol rows of each reel (three symbols on each of the reel display portion 1101 to 1105 with a total of fifteen symbols) are displayed on each symbol display portion in the main display 1010B as shown in FIG. 22. Also, the scrolling direction is not only limited to the direction from up to down, the direction may also be from down to up. Further, the scrolling direction may differ on each reel display portion. Also the scrolling direction may also be set differently to each game.
  • In the embodiment, the stop sequence of the symbols on the reel display portions may be set appropriately. For example, all the reels may be stopped simultaneously on the reel display portions (reel display portions 1101 to 1105).
  • A winning combination is determined based on the number of the same symbols displayed after the reels are stopped, and award corresponding to the winning combination is provided. If the winning combination is won, the amount, which is obtained by multiplying a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination by a bet number, will be provided to the player.
  • Next, the free game will be described. The free game is executed in a condition that a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of scatter symbols (in this embodiment, STAR symbol 1051H) are displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C. The sequence of the free game is almost same as the base game except that no gaming value (credit) equal to the bet amount is expensed at the beginning of the game and the game is automatically executed in succession without any player's operation on the operation buttons.
  • Next, the winning combination and the award which are provided at the base game and the free game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment will be described based on FIG. 23. FIG. 23 shows the content of a payout table used in the embodiment. In the payout table, the winning combinations correspond to the awards.
  • Here, the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 shows the payout amount when the bet number is one. In other words, when the bet number is one, the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 is paid out, and when the bet number is two or more, an amount obtained by multiplying the payout amount shown in FIG. 23 by the bet number will be paid out.
  • For example, when five KING symbols 1051A are displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C, an amount obtained by multiplying 50 credits by the bet number will be paid out. For example, if the bet number is “2”, 100 credits will be provided.
  • Also, when four ACE symbols 1051D are displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C, an amount obtained by multiplying 80 credits by the bet number will be paid out. For example, if bet number is “3”, 240 credits will be provided.
  • A payout amount corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 23 is set in a same way as described above. However, when the symbols displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C and 1115A to 1115C are none of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 23, this means that the player has lost the game, and no credit will be paid out as the player has lost the game.
  • Here, the payout table shown in FIG. 23 is one example, the types of the winning combinations and the payout amount may be set appropriately. And, the game may be configured to contain plural payout tables, and the payout tables may be selectable in accordance with the payout ratio which is set. Also, the payout table used in the free game may be different from the payout table used in the base game.
  • Next, the first main control process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawing. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the first main control process.
  • When the power switch is ON (the power is turned ON), each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S1001. In the initial setting process S1001, the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 1043 and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044. And once the BIOS extracted in the RAM 1044 is executed, diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042. Further, the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044 and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information. And also the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • In S1002, the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the first main game process. The game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the first main game process. And the first main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • Next, a sub process of the first main game process in S1002 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment. The programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 1042.
  • In S1011, the start acceptance process is executed. In the start acceptance process, insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are made by the player.
  • In S1012, it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 1042 corresponding to the start button. Here, when it is determined that the start button is not operated (S1012: NO), the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S1011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start button is operated (S1012: YES), the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S1013.
  • In S1013, a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044. Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • Process in S1013 will be described in detail. FIG. 26 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 20 are associated with code numbers. FIG. 27 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 27. The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 26.
  • Here, since the number of the random number values corresponding to each code number is different as shown in FIG. 27, appearance probability of each symbol shown in FIG. 26 may be controlled. For example, in FIG. 27, a random number value range “512” to “720” corresponds to code number “4”, and a random number value range “761” to “767” corresponds to code number “5”. As a result, since the code number “4” may appear more often than the code number “5”, JACK symbol 1051C corresponding to the code number “4” may have a higher appearance probability than the THUNDER symbol 1051G corresponding to the code number “5”.
  • Also, with respect to the reel display portion 1101, in a case that the reel shown in FIG. 20 is used, and when “136” is sampled, it is determined that code number is “08” based on the table shown in FIG. 27. And then, it is determined that the TEN symbol 1051E corresponding to the code number “08” is determined as the symbol to be stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B with the use of the table shown in FIG. 26.
  • Also, as shown in FIG. 28, the sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • Returning to FIG. 25, in S1014, a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105. After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034, or the like) in a unit game is started. Here, the unit game is defined as a sequence of processes which include starting of the variable display on each reel, stopping and displaying of all reels, and a payout process in which a predetermined amount of gaming medium is provided, when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
  • Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence. As a result, symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C, and 1115A to 1115C.
  • Here, the symbol determined in S1013 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B. For example, when a BELL symbol 1051F (code number: 9) is stopped, a TEN symbol 1051E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111A, and a KING symbol 1051A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111C (see FIG. 26).
  • After that, in S1015, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination displayed on the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each of the reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1015: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1016. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1015: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1017.
  • In S1016, the payout process is executed. In the payout process, the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S1015 is provided to the player.
  • In S1017, in case that it is determined whether or not a free game trigger is realized. In the embodiment, three or more STAR symbols 1051H are stopped, it is determined “YES” at S1017.
  • If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S1017 (S1017: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1018. In S1018, a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • On the other hand, in S1017, if it is determined that the free game trigger is not realized (S1017: NO), the first main game process will be terminated.
  • Next, the free game process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts of the free game process.
  • In S1021, the additional payout amount is determined. The additional payout amount is determined from among “100”, “50”, “20” and “10” by lottery. The additional payout amount may be set appropriately. Also, the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • In S1022, the symbol lottery process is executed. Since the symbol lottery process is the same as S1013 in the first main game process (see FIG. 25), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1023, the reel spin control process is executed. Since the reel spin control process is the same as S1014 in the first main game process (see FIG. 25), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1024, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each of the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1024: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1025. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1024: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1026.
  • In S1025, a payout amount addition process is executed. In the payout amount addition process, a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S1024 will be added. Here, the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S1029 which is to be described later.
  • In S1026, it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S1026: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1027. On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S1026: NO), the procedure will be returned to S1022.
  • In S1027, a payout process is executed. In the payout process, a payout amount which is obtained in S1025 is paid out to the player. Here, in above process, the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. However, the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game has been executed.
  • In S1028, the symbol combination to be stopped is determined. Here, a symbol combination table is referred. FIG. 31 shows one example of a symbol combination table.
  • In the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 31, to each additional payout amount, code numbers of the symbols stopped on symbol portions 1111B to 1115B, and symbol combinations on the main display are defined. Here, the code number in FIG. 29 corresponds to the table in FIG. 26. Also, in FIG. 29, symbol combination may be not defined.
  • For example, when the additional payout amount is “100”, the code numbers directed to the symbols to be stopped on the symbol display portions 1111B, 1112B, 1113B, 1114B, 1115B, are determined as [“13”-“13”-“13”-“13”-“13”] or [“6”-“6”-“6”-“6”-“14”].
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“13”-“13”-“13”-“13”-“13”], fifteen of ACE symbol are displayed on the main display 1010B. As a result, [“15 of a kind” of ACE symbols 1051D] is realized, and the additional payout amount is “300” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“6”-“6”-“6”-“6”-“14”], eight of BELL symbols 1051F, four of THUNDER symbols 1051G, two of ACE symbols 1051D, and one JACK symbol 1051C are displayed. As a result, [“8 of a kind” of BELL symbols 1051F] and [“4 of a kind” of THUNDER symbols 1051F] are realized, and the additional payout amount is “300 (200+100)” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“14”-“14”-“11”-“12”-“13”], ten of ACE symbols 1051D, two of JACK symbols 1051C, two of the STAR symbols 1051H, and one KING symbol 1051A are displayed. As a result, [“10 of a kind” of ACE symbol 1051D] is realized, and the additional payout amount is “200” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“4”-“15”-“17”-“16”-“16”], four of BELL symbols 1051F, four of THUNDER symbols 1051G, two of KING symbols 1051A, two of JACK symbols 1051C, one QUEEN symbol 1051B, one ACE symbol 1051D, and one TEN symbol 1051E are displayed. As a result, [“4 of a kind” of BELL symbols 1051F] and [“4 of a kind” of THUNDER symbols 1051F] are realized, and the additional payout amount is “200 (100+100)” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“7”-“10”-“10”-“16”-“16”], four of BELL symbols 1051F, two of KING symbols 1051A, two QUEEN symbols 1051B, two JACK symbols 1051C, one TEN symbol 1051E, two THUNDER symbols 1051G, and two STAR symbols 1051H are displayed. As a result, [“4 of a kind” of BELL symbols 1051F] is realized, and the additional payout amount is “100” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“11”-“11”-“15”-“9”-“9”], four of KING symbols 1051A, three of ACE symbols 1051D, two of TEN symbols 1051E, two of BELL symbols 1051F, two of STAR symbols 1051H, one JACK symbol 1051C, and one THUNDER symbol 1051G are displayed. As a result, [“4 of a kind” of KING symbols 1051A] and [“3 of a kind” of ACE symbols 1051D] are realized, and the additional payout amount is “100 (40+60)” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“18”-“19”-“4”-“12”-“16”], five of JACK symbols 1051C, two of QUEEN symbols 1051B, two of ACE symbols 1051D, two of BELL symbols 1051F, two of THUNDER symbols 1051G, one KING symbol 1051A, and one STAR symbol 1051H are displayed. As a result, [“5 of a kind” of JACK symbols 1051F] and [“4 of a kind” of THUNDER symbols 1051F] are realized, and the additional payout amount is “50” (see FIG. 23).
  • In FIG. 31, when the code numbers on the symbol display portions 1111B to 1115B are [“9”-“9”-“11”-“11”-“4”], five of KING symbols 1051A, two of ACE symbols 1051D, two of TEN symbols 1051E, two of BELL symbols 1051F, two of STAR symbols 1051H, one JACK symbol 1051C, and one THUNDER symbol 1051G are displayed. As a result, [“5 of a kind” of KING symbols 1051A] is realized, and the additional payout amount is “50” (see FIG. 23).
  • Now return the description to FIG. 30.
  • In S1029, reels are spun on their respective reel display portions (see FIG. 21).
  • In S1030, reels are stopped by a timing in which the symbol combination determined in S1028 is displayed.
  • In S1031, the payout amount determined in S1021 is displayed in a part of area on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B. FIG. 32 shows a state that the additional payout amount is displayed on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • In S35, a payout process is executed. In the payout process, the payout amount determined in S1021 is paid out to the player.
  • As described above, according to the first embodiment of one or more aspects of the disclosure, additional payout amount is determined in the free game process. When the free game is executed a predetermined number, an outcome based on the game result of the free games will be provided to the player. Thereafter, the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional payout amount. And, reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is displayed on the reel display portion. Then, the determined additional payout amount is displayed. And, the determined additional payout amount is paid out to the player.
  • [First Variant of Second Embodiment]
  • Next, the first variant of the second embodiment embodying one or more aspects of the disclosure will be described with reference to the drawings. In the first variant of the second embodiment, in addition to the processes executed in the above described second embodiment, an image effect process is executed in the free game process. Also, since the first main control process and the first main game process of the second embodiment are the same as those in the first variant of the second embodiment, the detailed description will be omitted here.
  • Hereinafter, the free game process in the first variant will be described. FIG. 33 is a part of the flowchart of the free game process in the first variant of the second embodiment. Since the processes of S1061 to S1066, and S1068 are the same as the process of S1021 to S1027 (see FIG. 30), description will be omitted here. And after S1068, the procedure will be shifted to the S1028 in FIG. 30.
  • Also, the image effect process may be also executed at S1066 after S1064 or S1065.
  • FIRST EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR FIRST VARIANT
  • Next, a first example of the image effect process in S1066 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the first example, when a predetermined condition is met, color of a predetermined object which is displayed on the background portion 1121 will be changed.
  • The predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121, the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • In the first example, the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1021. FIG. 34 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding to the color of the object.
  • As shown in FIG. 34, when the additional payout amount is “100”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”→“red”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • When the additional payout amount is “50”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • When the additional payout amount is “20”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”, in accordance with the executed number of the free game.
  • When the additional payout amount is “10”, the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • Also, a table may be used to define color change timing of the object. FIG. 35 is one example of a table in which the color change timing of the object is defined.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 35, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • When five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • Also, in the case where the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 35, when four free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • Also, when seven free games are terminated, the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • Also, in the case where the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 35, when six free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • Also, in the case where the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 35, the color of the object is not changed regardless of the number of the free games.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the color change of the object) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract the players.
  • Also, each of additional payout amounts has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns to change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 36 shows a table which defines patterns to change timing in case additional payout amount “100” are defined.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 36, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • Also, when five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • Also, in the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 36, when two free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • Also, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • Also, when eight free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • Also, in the case where a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 36, when nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “red”.
  • Here, FIG. 36 shows the patterns to change timing in the case the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns to change timing, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns to change timing, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the color changes from “green” directly to “red” without going through “blue” and “yellow”, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • SECOND EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR FIRST VARIANT
  • Next, a second example of the image effect process in S1066 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number (namely, executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the second example, when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121. For example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 37 shows a state that the small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 38 shows a state that the medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 39 shows a state that big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • Also the moving direction of the ball is merely one example. And, the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • In the second example, a ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1021. The size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table. FIG. 40 is one of examples of the table in which patterns regarding size and the timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 40, when two free games are terminated, a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when six free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 40, when one free game is terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when seven free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 40, when three free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, in the case where the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 40, no ball moves on the background portion 1121 regardless of the number of the free games.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect may be enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, each of additional payout amounts has plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 41 shows a table which defines patterns regarding “size and timing of the moving ball” in case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 41, when three free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when six free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 41, when one free game is terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when three free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, when four free games are terminated, a big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where a “Pattern C” is selected FIG. 41, when nine free games are terminated, a big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Here, FIG. 41 shows patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball in the case the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • THIRD EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR FIRST VARIANT
  • Next, a third example of the image effect process in S1066 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number (namely, executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the third example, when a predetermined condition is met, display pattern regarding additional payout amount candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating the additional payout amount determined and selected in S1021, other areas indicating not-selected additional payout amounts turn dark.
  • FIG. 42 shows a display example of the main display 1010B when the game shifts to a free game.
  • FIG. 43 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that where “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 44 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that “50” and “10” are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 45 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that only “100” remains as the additional payout amount candidate.
  • In the third example, display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1021. A table may be used when determining the display pattern. FIG. 46 is one of examples of the table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 46, when the two free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when six free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 46, when three free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when seven free games are terminated, the display stat is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when ten free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “20” FIG. 46, when one free game is terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when five free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 46, when two free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when seven free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the display pattern regarding the to-be-displayed additional payout amount candidates) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, a sequence of dropped-out additional payout amounts among from the candidates can be set so that the larger payout amount (in the above example, “100”) is dropped out among from the candidate at last. Herewith, the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • Also, the sequence of dropped-out payout amounts among from the candidates can be set so that the smaller payout amount (in the above example, “10”) is dropped out among from the candidates at first. Herewith, the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • Also, each of additional payout amounts has plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 47 shows a table which defines the display patterns in case the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected FIG. 47, when three free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when six free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 47, when two free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 47, when eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” and 20 are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Also, when ten free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Here, FIG. 47 shows the case where the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural display patterns, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has the plural display patterns, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since plural payout amounts are dropped out at the same time, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the first variant thereof comprises a display that displays symbol display portions and a background portion, the display portions displaying reels and symbols displayed on the reels, and a processor that executes a game. The game is executed in plural game modes and the plural game modes include a first game mode and a second game mode. Also, the reels are spun and then stopped in the game. Also, a part of the symbols is displayed on the symbol display portions. Also, the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode if a predetermined number or more of specific symbols are displayed in the first game mode, determines an additional payout amount when the game mode is changed to the second game mode, execute the games a predetermined number of times, provides an outcome corresponding to a result of the executed games to a player, spins the reels, stops the reels at a time when a symbol combination corresponding to the additional payout amount is displayed, provides an outcome corresponding to the additional payout amount, and changes the game mode from the second game mode to the first game mode.
  • Herewith, since the timing of the stops of the reels is determined based on the determined additional payout amount, entertainment aspects are enhanced and it can attract a player.
  • As described above, according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the first variant thereof, the additional payout amount is determined in the free game process. Also, in the free game process, an image effect is made based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount. When the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times, an outcome based on the game result of the free game is provided to the player. Thereafter, the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional payout amount. And, reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is stopped on the reel display portion. Then, the determined additional payout amount is displayed. And, the determined additional payout amount is provided to the player.
  • Here, in the above second embodiment and the first variant thereof, it is configured that the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and reel spin control process. However, the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process. In this case, the above described image effect process (S1066) may be configured to be executed in parallel with the above described free game process (FIG. 33 and FIG. 30) as a multi-process.
  • [Second Variant of Second Embodiment]
  • Next, the second main control process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the second variant of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawing. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the second main control process.
  • When the power switch is ON (the power is turned ON), each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S1101. In the initial setting process S1101, the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 1043 and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044. And once the BIOS extracted in the RAM 1044 is executed, diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042. Further, the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044, and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information. And also the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • In S1102, the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the second main game process. The game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the second main game process. And the second main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • Next, a sub process of the second main game process in S1102 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the second main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment. The programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 1042.
  • In S1111, the start acceptance process is executed. In the start acceptance process, insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are made by the player.
  • In S1112, it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 1042 corresponding to the start button. Here, when it is determined that the start button is not operated (S1112: NO), the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S1111. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start button is operated (S1112: YES), the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S1113.
  • In S1113, a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044. Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • Process in S1113 will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 20 are associated with code numbers. FIG. 51 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 51. The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 50.
  • Here, since the number of the random number values corresponding to each code number is different as shown in FIG. 51, appearance probability of each symbol shown in FIG. 50 may be controlled. For example, in FIG. 51, a random number value range “512” to “720” corresponds to code number “4”, and a random number value range “761” to “767” corresponds to code number “5”. As a result, since the code number “4” may appear more often than the code number “5”, JACK symbol 1051C corresponding to the code number “4” may have a higher appearance probability than the THUNDER symbol 1051G corresponding to the code number “5”.
  • Also, with respect to the reel display portion 1101, in a case that the reel shown in FIG. 20 is used, and when “136” is sampled, it is determined that code number is “08” based on the table shown in FIG. 51. And then, it is determined that the TEN symbol 1051E corresponding to the code number “08” is determined as the symbol to be stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B with the use of the table shown in FIG. 50.
  • Also, as shown in FIG. 52, the sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • Returning to FIG. 49, in S1114, a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105. After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034, or the like) in a unit game is started.
  • Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence. As a result, symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C, and 1115A to 1115C.
  • Here, the symbol determined in S1113 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B. For example, when a BELL symbol 1051F (code number: 9) is stopped, a TEN symbol 1051E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111A, and a KING symbol 1051A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111C (see FIG. 50).
  • After that, in S1115, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination displayed on the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1115: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1115: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1117.
  • In S1116, the payout process is executed. In the payout process, the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S1115 is provided to the player.
  • Next, in S1117, it is determined whether or not a free game trigger is realized. In the embodiment, in case that three or more STAR symbols 1051H are stopped, it is determined “YES” at S1117.
  • If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S1117 (S1117: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1118. In S1118, a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • On the other hand, in S1117, if it is determined that the free game trigger is not realized (S1117: NO), the second main game process will be terminated.
  • Next, the free game process will be described. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts of the free game process.
  • In S1121, the additional number of games is determined. For example, the additional number of games may be determined and selected from among “10”, “8”, “5” and “3” by lottery. The additional number of games may be set appropriately. Also, the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • In S1122, the symbol lottery process is executed. Since the symbol lottery process is the same as S1113 in the second main game process (see FIG. 49), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1123, the reel spin control process is executed. Since the reel spin control process is the same as S1114 in the second main game process (see FIG. 49), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1124, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1124: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1125. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1124: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1126.
  • In S1125, a payout amount addition process is executed. In the payout amount addition process, a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S1124 will be added. Here, the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S1128 which is to be described later.
  • In S1126, an image effect process is executed. The detail of the image effect process will be described later.
  • In S1127, it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S1127: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1128. On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S1127: NO), the procedure will be returned to S1122.
  • In S1128, a payout process is executed. In the payout process, a payout amount which is accumulated in S1125 is paid out to the player. Here, in above process, the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. However, the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • In S1129, the additional number of games will be displayed in a part of a background portion 1121 on the main display 1010B. FIG. 55 shows a state that the additional number of games is displayed on the part of the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • In S30, a symbol lottery process is executed. Since the symbol lottery process is the same as S1113 in the second main game process (see FIG. 49), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1131, a reel spin control process is executed. Since the reel spin control process is the same as S1114 in the second main game process (see FIG. 49), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1132, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code numbers of respective reel display portions 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1132: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1133. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1132: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1134.
  • In S1133, a payout amount addition process is executed. In the payout amount addition process, a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S1132 will be added. Here, the added payout amount is paid out to the player in the payout process of S1135 which is to be described later.
  • In S1134, it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the additional number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the additional number of times (S1134: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1135. On the other hand, if it is determined that the free game is not executed by the additional number of times (S1134: NO), the procedure will be returned to S1130.
  • In S1135, a payout process is executed. In the payout process, a payout amount added in S1132 is paid out to the player. Here, in above process, the added payout amount is paid out at once after the free game has been executed by the predetermined number of times. The added payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • FIRST EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR SECOND VARIANT
  • Next, a first example of the image effect process in S1126 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the first example, when a predetermined condition is met, color of a predetermined object which is displayed on the background portion 1121 will be changed.
  • The predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121, the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • In the first example, the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S1121. FIG. 56 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding the color of the object.
  • As shown in FIG. 56, when the additional number of games is “10”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”→“red”, in accordance with the executed number of the free games.
  • When the additional number of games is “8”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”, in accordance with the executed number of free games.
  • When the additional number of games is “5”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”, in accordance with the executed number of the free game.
  • When the additional number of games is “3”, the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • Also, a table may be used to define color change timing of the object. FIG. 57 is one example of a table in which color change timing of the object is defined.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “10” in FIG. 57, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • When five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “8” in FIG. 57, when four free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • When seven free games are terminated, the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “5” in FIG. 57, when six free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “3” in FIG. 57, the color of the object is not changed regardless of the number of the free games.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the color change of the object) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games, the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is heightened, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, each of additional number of games has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns to change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 58 shows a table that defines patterns to change timing in case the additional number of games is “10”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 58, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • When five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 58, when two free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • When three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • When eight free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 58, when nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “red”.
  • Here, FIG. 58 shows patterns to change timing in the case where the additional number of games is “10”. Plural patterns to change timing, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • Since each additional number of games has the plural patterns to change timing, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the color changes from “green” directly to “red” without going through “blue” and “yellow”, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • SECOND EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR SECOND VARIANT
  • Next, a second example of the image effect process in S1126 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the second example, when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121. For example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 59 shows a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 60 shows a state that a medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 61 shows a state that big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • Also the moving direction of the ball is merely one example. And, the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • In the second example, a ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S1121. The size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table. FIG. 62 is one of examples of the table in which patterns regarding size and the timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “10” in FIG. 62, when two free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When six free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “8” in FIG. 62, when one free game is terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When seven free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “5” in FIG. 62, when three free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Also, in the case where the additional number of games is “3” in FIG. 62, no ball moves on the background portion 1121 regardless of the number of the free games.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games, the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect may be enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, each of additional number of games may have plural patterns regarding “sizes and timing of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 63 shows a table that defines patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” in the case the additional number of games is “100”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 63, when three free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When six free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 63, when one free game is terminated, a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When three free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • When four free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case where a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 63, when nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Here, FIG. 63 shows patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball in the case where the additional number of games is “10”. Plural patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • Since each of the additional number of games has the plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since only the big size ball moves without allowing the small size ball and the medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • THIRD EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR SECOND VARIANT
  • Next, a third example of the image effect process in S1126 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, executable number of free games) as “10”.
  • In the third example, when a predetermined condition is met, display pattern regarding additional-number-of-games candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating an additional number of games determined and selected in S1121, areas indicating not-selected additional number of games turn dark.
  • FIG. 64 shows a display example of the main display 1010B when the game mode is shifted to free game.
  • FIG. 65 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • FIG. 66 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that “8” and “5” are dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • FIG. 67 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that only “10” remains as the additional-number-of-games candidate.
  • In the third example, display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games determined in S1121. A table may be used when determining the display pattern. FIG. 68 is one of examples of the table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “10” in FIG. 68, when the two free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When six free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “8” in FIG. 68, when three free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When seven free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When ten free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “5 in FIG. 68”, when one free game is terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is dropped out from the candidate of the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When five free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • In the case where the additional number of games is “3” in FIG. 68, when two free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When seven free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When nine free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a mode showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the display pattern regarding to-be-displayed additional-number-of-games candidates) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional number of games, the player may presume the additional number of games. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, the sequence of dropped-out numbers among from the candidates can be set so that a larger additional number of games (in the above example, “10”) is dropped out among from the candidates at last. Herewith, the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • Also, the sequence of dropped-out number among from the candidates can be set so that a smaller additional number of games (in the above example, “3”) is dropped out among from the candidates at first. Herewith, the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • Also, each additional number of games may have plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 69 shows a table that defines the display patterns in case that the additional number of games is “10”.
  • In the case where a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 69, when three free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When six free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • In the case where a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 69, when two free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “5” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • In the case where a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 69, when eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “3” and “5” are dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • When ten free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “8” is dropped out from the additional-number-of-games candidates.
  • Here, FIG. 69 shows the case where the additional number of games is “10”. Plural display patterns, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional numbers of games are “8”, “5” and “3”.
  • Since each of the additional number of games has the plural display patterns, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since plural additional-number-of-games candidates are dropped at the same time, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the second variant thereof comprises a display that displays symbol display portions and a background portion, the display portions displaying reels and symbols displayed on the reels, and a processor that executes a game. The game is executed in plural game modes and the plural game modes include a first game mode and a second game mode. Also, the reels are spun and then stopped in the game. Also, a part of the symbols is displayed on the symbol display portions. Also, the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode if a predetermined number or more of specific symbols are displayed in the first game mode, determines an additional number of games when the game mode is changed to the second game mode, executes the games a predetermined number in the second game mode, makes an image effect on the background portion of the display based on a number of the executed games and the additional number of games in the second game mode, displays the additional number of games after the games are executed the predetermined number, execute the games the additional number, provide an outcome corresponding to a game result of the games executed the predetermined number and a game result of the games executed the additional number, and changes the game mode from the second game mode to the first game mode.
  • Herewith, since the image effect is made based on the number of executed games and the additional number of games, entertainment aspects are enhanced and it can attract a player.
  • As described above, according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the second variant thereof, the additional number of games is determined in the free game process. Also, in the free game process, an image effect is made based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional number of games. When the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times, an outcome based on the game result of the free game is provided to the player. Thereafter, the symbol combination to be stopped on the symbol display portion is determined based on the additional number of games. And, reels are spun on the reel display portion, and are stopped so that the determined symbol combination is stopped on the reel display portion. Then, the determined additional number of games is displayed. And, the determined additional number of games is provided to the player.
  • Here, in the above second embodiment and the second variant thereof, it is configured that the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and reel spin control process. However, the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process. In this case, the above described image effect process (S1126) may be configured to be executed in parallel with the above described free game process (FIG. 53 and FIG. 54) as a multi-process.
  • [Third Variant of Second Embodiment]
  • Next, the third main control process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the third variant of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawing. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the third main control program.
  • When the power switch is ON (the power is turned ON), each of the main control board 1071 and the sub-control board 1072 is activated and the controller 1041 executes the initial setting process of S1201. In the initial setting process S1201, the main CPU 1042 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 43, and extracts the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS to the RAM 1044. And once the BIOS extracted in the RAM 1044 is executed, diagnosis of the variety of peripheral devices and initialization are executed by the main CPU 1042. Further, the CPU 1042 writes the game programs from the ROM 1043 to the RAM 1044, and obtains payout ratio setting data and nation identification information. And also the CPU 1042 executes the certification process to each program during the execution of the initial setting process.
  • In S1202, the game program and the like are read out from the RAM 1044 in sequence and are executed so as to progress the third main game process. The game in the slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment is progressed by the execution of the third main game process. And the third main game process is repeatedly executed while the power of the slot machine 1001 is supplied.
  • Next, the third main game process in S1202 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the third main game process executed in slot machine 1001 according to the embodiment. The programs to execute the first renewing process are stored in the ROM 1043 or RAM 1044 of the slot machine 1001 and are executed by the main CPU 42.
  • In S1211, the start acceptance process is executed. In the start acceptance process, insertion of coins and the bet operation using the BET button in the operation buttons 1026 are executed by the player.
  • In S1212, it is determined whether or not the start button in the operation buttons 1026 is operated. The determination is executed based on the input signal to the main CPU 42 corresponding to the start button. Here, when it is determined that the start button is not operated (S1212: NO), the game returns to the start acceptance process. The operation such as correction of the bet number is possible in S1211. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start button is operated (S1212: YES), the bet number which is set is deducted from the credits owned by the player, and the subtraction result is stored in the RAM 1044 as the betting information. And then, the game proceeds to S1213.
  • In S1213, a symbol lottery process is executed. Concretely, first, random number values are sampled from a predetermined range of random number values by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 1044. Thereafter, the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each symbol display portion are determined based on the sampled random number value and the table.
  • Process in S1213 will be described in detail. FIG. 72 is one example of a table in which symbols displayed on the reels shown in FIG. 8 are associated with code numbers. FIG. 73 is one example of a table in which random number values are associated with code numbers. Code numbers are determined based on the random number values sampled from a predetermined random number value range (for example, 0 to 65535) by using the table shown in FIG. 73. The symbols to be stopped are determined by the determined code number and the table shown in FIG. 72.
  • Here, since the number of the random number values corresponding to each code number is different as shown in FIG. 73, appearance probability of each symbol shown in FIG. 72 may be controlled. For example, in FIG. 73, a random number value range “512” to “720” corresponds to code number “4”, and a random number value range “761” to “767” corresponds to code number “5”. As a result, since the code number “4” may appear more often than the code number “5”, JACK symbol 1051C corresponding to the code number “4” may have a higher appearance probability than the THUNDER symbol 1051G corresponding to the code number “5”.
  • For example, with respect to the reel display portion 1101, in a case that the reel shown in FIG. 20 is used, and when “136” is sampled, it is determined that code number is “08” based on the table shown in FIG. 73. And then, it is determined that the TEN symbol 1051E corresponding to the code number “08” is determined as the symbol to be stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B with the use of the table shown in FIG. 72.
  • Also, as shown in FIG. 74, the sampled random number values may correspond directly to symbols.
  • Returning to FIG. 71, in S1214, a reel spin control process is executed. Specifically, the reels are variably displayed on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105. After that, effect pattern (image display state on the main display 1010B or sound output pattern of the speaker 1034, or the like) in a unit game is started.
  • Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, reels stop spinning on the reel display portions 1101 to 1105 in a predetermined sequence. As a result, symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portions 1111A to 1111C, 1112A to 1112C, 1113A to 1113C, 1114A to 1114C, and 1115A to 1115C.
  • Here, the symbol determined in S1213 is stopped on the symbol display portion 1111B. For example, when a BELL symbol 1051F (code number: 9) is stopped, a TEN symbol 1051E (code number: 8) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111A, and a KING symbol 1051A (code number: 10) is displayed on the symbol display portion 1111C (see FIG. 72).
  • After that, in S1215, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination displayed on the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1215: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1216. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1215: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1217.
  • In S1216, the payout process is executed. In the payout process, the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination which is determined in S1215 is provided to the player.
  • Next, in S1217, it is determined whether or not a free game trigger is realized. In the embodiment, in case that three or more STAR symbols 1051H are stopped, it is determined “YES” at S1217.
  • If it is determined that the free game trigger is realized in S1217 (S1217: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1218. In S1218, a free game process is executed. Here, detail of the free game process will be described later.
  • On the other hand, in S1217, if it is determined that the free game trigger is not realized (S1217: NO), the third main game process will be terminated.
  • Next, the free game process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the free game process.
  • In S1221, the additional payout amount is determined. The additional payout amount is determined and selected from among “100”, “50”, “20” and “10” by lottery. The additional payout amount may be set appropriately. Also, the method of lottery may be set appropriately.
  • In S1222, the symbol lottery process is executed. Since the symbol lottery process is the same as S1213 in the third main game process (see FIG. 71), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1223, the reel spin control process is executed. Since the reel spin control process is the same as S1214 in the third main game process (see FIG. 71), description will be omitted here.
  • In S1224, it is determined whether the symbol combination displayed in the main display 1010B is a winning combination. This determination is made based on the code number of each reel display portion 1101 to 1105 stored in the RAM 1044.
  • If it is determined that the winning combination is realized (S1224: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1225. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the winning combinations is realized (S1224: NO), the procedure will be shifted to S1226.
  • In S1225, a payout amount addition process is executed. In the payout amount addition process, a payout amount corresponding to the winning combination determined in S1224 will be added. Here, the added payout amount will be provided to the player in the payout process of S1229 which is to be described later.
  • In S1226, an image effect process is executed. The detail of the image effect process will be described later.
  • In S1227, it is determined whether or not the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. If it is determined that the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times (S1227: YES), the procedure will be shifted to S1228. On the other hand, when it is determined that the free game is not executed by the predetermined number of times (S1227: NO), the procedure will be returned to S1222.
  • In S1228, the additional payout amount determined in S1221 is displayed in a part of area on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B. FIG. 76 shows a state that the additional payout amount is displayed on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • In S1229, a payout process is executed. In the payout process, a payout amount which is accumulated in S1225 is paid out to the player. Further, in above process, the added payout amount is paid out in at once after the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times. However, the payout amount may also be paid out after termination of each free game.
  • FIRST EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR THIRD VARIANT
  • Next, a first example of the image effect process in S1226 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one example, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of the free games) as “10”.
  • In the first example, when a predetermined condition is met, color of a predetermined object which is displayed on the background portion 1121 will be changed.
  • The predetermined object may be defined as, for example, the color of the background in the background portion 1121, the color of a predetermined character, or the like. In the below description, when the game mode is shifted to free game, the color of the object is defined as “green”.
  • In the first example, the color of the object is changed based on the number of the executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1221. FIG. 77 shows one example of a changing pattern regarding the color of the object.
  • As shown in FIG. 77, when the additional payout amount is “100”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”→“red”, in accordance with the executed number of free games. When the additional payout amount is “50”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”→“yellow”, in accordance with the number of executed free games. When the additional payout amount is “20”, the color of the object may be changed “green”→“blue”, in accordance with the executed number of free games. And when the additional payout amount is “10”, the color of the object may remain “green”.
  • Also, a table may be used to define color change timing of the object. FIG. 78 is one example of a table in which color change timing of the object is defined.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 78, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”. When five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”. When nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 78, when four free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”. When seven free games are terminated, the color of the object may be changed from “blue” to “yellow”.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 78, when six free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 78, the color of the object is not changed regardless of the number of free games.
  • As a result, since the image effect (namely, the change of the color of the object) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is heightened, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, each additional payout amount has plural patterns to change timing, and one of the patterns t o change timing can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 79 shows a table which defines patterns to change timing in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • In the case that a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 79, when three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”. When five free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”. When nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case that a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 79, when two free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “blue”. When three free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “blue” to “yellow”. When eight free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “yellow” to “red”.
  • In the case that a “Pattern C” is selected FIG. 79, when nine free games are terminated, the color of the object is changed from “green” to “red”.
  • FIG. 79 shows patterns to change timing in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns to change timing, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns to change timing, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the color changes from “green” directly to “red” without going through “blue” and “yellow”, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • SECOND EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR THIRD VARIANT
  • Next, a second example of the image effect process in S1226 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one example, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of the free games) as “10”.
  • In the second example, when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined object moves on the background portion 1121. For example, an image effect in which a ball with a predetermined size moves from left side to right side may be made.
  • FIG. 80 shows a state that a small size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 81 shows a state that a medium size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • FIG. 82 shows state that a big size ball moves from left side to right side on the background portion 1121 of the main display 1010B.
  • Also the moving direction of the ball is merely one example. And the shape of the object is also merely one example.
  • In the second example, the ball with a predetermined size moves on the background portion 1121 based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1221. The size and the timing of the moving ball may be defined by a table. FIG. 83 is one example of a table in which patterns regarding size and timing of the moving ball are defined.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 83, when two free games are terminated, a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When six free games are terminated, a medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When nine free games are terminated, a big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 83, when one free game is terminated, a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When seven free games are terminated, a medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 83, when three free games are terminated, a small size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case that the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 83, no ball moves on the background portion 1121 regardless of the number of free games.
  • As a result, since image effect (namely, the movement of a ball with a predetermined size) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, each additional payout amount may have plural patterns regarding “sizes and timings of moving ball”, and one of the patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball” can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 84 shows a table which defines patterns regarding “size and timing of the moving ball” in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • In the case that a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 84, when three free games are terminated, the small size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When six free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case that a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 84, when one free game is terminated, the small size bail moves on the background portion 1121. When three free games are terminated, the medium size ball moves on the background portion 1121. When four free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • In the case that a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 84, when nine free games are terminated, the big size ball moves on the background portion 1121.
  • Here, FIG. 84 shows patterns regarding size and the timing of moving ball in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • THIRD EXAMPLE OF IMAGE EFFECT PROCESS FOR THIRD VARIANT
  • Next, a third example of the image effect process in S1226 will be described. Here, in the following description, as one of the examples, description will be given by defining the predetermined number of times (namely, the executable number of the free games) as “10”.
  • In the third example, when a predetermined condition is met, a display pattern regarding additional payout amount candidates displayed on the background portion 1121 is changed. For example, except an area indicating the additional payout amount determined in S1221, other areas indicating not-selected additional payout amount turn dark.
  • FIG. 85 shows a display example of the main display 1010B when the game mode is shifted to free game. In FIG. 85, all the additional payout amount candidates are displayed.
  • FIG. 86 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 87 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that “50” and “10” are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • FIG. 88 shows a display example of the main display 1010B showing a state that only “100” remains as additional payout amount candidate.
  • In the third example, display state on the background portion 1121 is determined based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount determined in S1221. A table may be used when determining the display pattern. FIG. 89 is one example of a table in which display patterns on the background portion 1121 are defined.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “100” in FIG. 89, when two free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When six free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When nine free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “50” in FIG. 89, when three free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When seven free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When ten free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “20” in FIG. 89, when one free game is terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When five free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When eight free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case where the additional payout amount is “10” in FIG. 89, when two free games are terminated, a display pattern is changed to a state showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When seven free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When nine free games are terminated, a display state is changed to a pattern showing that “100” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • As a result, since the image effect (namely, the display pattern regarding to-be-displayed additional payout amount candidates) is made based on the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is enhanced, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • Also, the sequence of dropped-out additional payout amount from the candidates can be set so that a larger additional payout amount (in the above example, “100”) is dropped out among from the candidates at last. Also, the sequence of dropped-out additional payout amount from the candidates can be set so that a smaller additional payout amount (in the above example, “10”) from the candidates at first. Herewith, the entertainment aspect will be more enhanced.
  • Also, each additional payout amount may have plural display patterns, and one of the display patterns can be selected by lottery.
  • FIG. 90 shows a table which defines the display patterns the case that the additional payout amount is “100”.
  • In the case that a “Pattern A” is selected in FIG. 90, when three free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When six free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case that a “Pattern B” is selected in FIG. 90, when two free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” is dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “20” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When nine free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • In the case that a “Pattern C” is selected in FIG. 90, when eight free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “10” and 20 are dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates. When ten free games are terminated, the display state is changed to a pattern showing that “50” is further dropped out from the additional payout amount candidates.
  • Further, FIG. 90 shows patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball in the case that the additional payout amount is “100”. Plural patterns regarding size and timing of moving ball, however, may be defined in the cases that the additional payout amounts are “50”, “20” and “10”.
  • Since each of the additional payout amounts has the plural patterns regarding “size and timing of moving ball”, the game may have further variety. Also, in the above “Pattern C”, since the only the big size ball moves without allowing small size ball and medium size ball to move, an entertainment aspect will be enhanced.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the third variant thereof comprises plural reels; a display device having a display portion and a background portion, the display portion displaying plural symbols displayed on each of the plural reels; and a processor to execute a game, wherein the game is executed in plural game modes, the plural game modes comprising a first game mode and a second game mode, in the game, the plural reels spin and then stop, a part of the plural symbols are displayed on a symbol display portion of the display device as a result of the game, the processor changes the game mode from the first game mode to the second game mode, during the first game mode, when predetermined symbols with a predetermined number or more are displayed, determines an additional payout amount when the game mode changes to the second game mode, executes the game for a predetermined number in the second game mode, executes an image effect corresponding to a number of executed games and the additional payout amount on the background portion of the display device during the second game mode, displays the determined additional payout amount is displayed after the game is executed for the predetermined number, payouts an outcome, based on a game result of the game executed for the predetermined number and the additional payout amount to a player, changes the game mode is changed from the second game mode to the first game mode.
  • As a result, since image effect is executed corresponding to the number of executed free games and the additional payout amount, the player may presume the additional payout amount. Therefore, the entertainment aspect is heightened, and the slot machine may attract more players.
  • As described above, according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and the third variant thereof, additional payout amount is determined in the free game process. Also, in the free game process, an image effect process is executed based on the number of executed free games and the determined additional payout amount. Here, in the image effect process, various image effects may be executed. When the free game is executed by the predetermined number of times, a determined payout amount is displayed. Thereafter, an outcome based on the game result of the free game and the additional payout amount is paid out to the player.
  • Here, in the above second embodiment and the third variant thereof, it is configured that the image effect is made after the symbol lottery process and the reel spin control process. However, the image effect may be made during the symbol lottery process or the reel spin control process. In this case, the above described image effect process (S1226) may be configured to be executed in parallel to the above described free game process (FIG. 75) as a multi-process.
  • Here, the one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment including the first through third variants are not limited to the above embodiment and various changes and modifications can be done within the scope of the present disclosure. For example, the reels used in the base game and the free game may be different. In this case, the reels used in the free game may be more favorable to the player than the reels used in the base game.
  • One or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the second embodiment and any variants of the second embodiment may be applied to the game system with link progressive bonus. And, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied to various card games.
  • Also, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied as a gaming method to execute the above process. Further, one or more aspects of the disclosure may be applied to the program for executing the gaming method by computer, or may be applied as record medium (tangible medium) in which the program is recorded.
  • Third Embodiment
  • Hereinafter, an embodiment embodying the disclosure as a slot machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings based on the embodiment embodying a slot machine.
  • A slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment, for example, has an image display device such as a liquid crystal display and the like, and executes a game by displaying various symbol images on the image display device. That is, the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment is realized as a video slot machine.
  • Also, the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment may also be implemented as a hybrid type slot machine which is configured from a mechanical reel and a transparent liquid crystal display device arranged in front of the mechanical reel.
  • Also, the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment may also be implemented as a mechanical slot machine having mechanical reels.
  • In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are arranged around a main display 2004 of the slot machine 2100. The decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 emit light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2100. Also, the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2300 is transmitted. The light emitting device 2300 is arranged at a side surface on a cabinet 2002 of the slot machine 2100. Further, the light emitted in the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted by an optical cable 2090.
  • First, a schematic structure of a slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 91 shows an external perspective of the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment.
  • The slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment is an upright type slot machine which is provided in a game hall such as a casino. The external perspective of the slot machine 2100 as shown in FIG. 91 is merely one example, and one or more aspects of the disclosure is not limited to the external perspective of the slot machine 2100.
  • The slot machine 2100 includes a cabinet 2002. The cabinet 2002 is an accommodation portion which accommodates the electric or the mechanic elements.
  • The cabinet 2002 includes a front door 2024. The front door 2024 is attached to the main body of the cabinet 2002 by hinge members and the like.
  • The slot machine 2100 includes an upper display 2003 and a main display 2004 at the front side of the cabinet 2002. The upper display 2003 is located on the upper column of the cabinet 2002 and the main display 2004 is located on the middle column of the cabinet 2002.
  • The upper display 2003 is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. Effect images, a payout table in the game, game rules and the like are displayed on the upper display 2003.
  • The main display 2004 is constructed from the liquid crystal panel. The main display 2004, for example, has plural reel display parts. Each of the reels are variably displayed and stopped.
  • A touch panel 2201 is arranged on the front side of the main display 2004. A player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 2201.
  • The decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004. Arrangement places of the decoration parts may be arbitrary, for example, the decoration parts may also be arranged around the cabinet 2002. The decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light emitted from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side (the player side) of the slot machine 2100.
  • Since the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004, the movement of the player's viewpoint between the main display 2004 and each decoration part may be reduced. Also, the display in which the game is executed will become highly visible so that the player may concentrate in the game.
  • Also, the slot machine becomes more noticeable than the other slot machines by arranging the decoration parts around the cabinet 2002, so that it may attract more players.
  • Also, the light emitting device 2300 is arranged on the side surface of the cabinet 2002. Also, the arrangement place of the light emitting device 2300 may be arbitrary, the light emitting device 2300 may be arranged at any place wherever the staff in the game hall may operate it easily. The light emitted inside the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted to the backside of the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022, and is diffused by the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022. The structure of the light emitting device 2300 and the transmission of the light will be described in detail later.
  • An operation table 2005 is arranged below the main display 2004 with one side extending to a front side of the main display 2004. An exchange button 2006, a payback button 2007, a help button 2008, a coin insertion slot 2009, a bill insertion slot 2010, a 1-BET button 2011, a spin button 2012, a 3-BET button 2013, a 5-BET button 2014, and a 8-BET button 2015 are arranged on the operation table 2005. The arrangement positions of these buttons may be set arbitrarily. Also, a part of the above buttons may be deleted or new buttons may be added or replaced if necessary.
  • The exchange button 2006 is a button to be pressed when a bill inserted from the bill insertion slot 2010 needs to be exchanged. The exchanged coins by the pressing of the exchange button 2006 are paid out to a coin receiving part 2017 from a coin payout slot 2016. The coin payout slot 2016 is provided at the bottom of the cabinet 2002. An exchange switch 2062 is connected to the exchange button 2006.
  • The payback button 2007 is a button to be pressed when a game is terminated. When the payback button 2007 is pressed, the coins which are obtained in the game will be paid out to the coin receiving part 2017 from the coin payout slot 2016. A payback switch 2063 is connected to the payback button 2007.
  • The help button 2008 is a button to be pressed when an operation method of a game will be displayed. When the help button 2008 is pressed, various help information will be displayed on the upper display 2003. A help switch 2064 is connected to the help button 2008.
  • A coin sensor 2065 is connected to the coin insertion slot 2009. When coins are inserted in the coin insertion slot 2009, coin detecting signal is output to a CPU 2050 through the coin sensor 2065.
  • A bill sensor 2066 is connected to the bill insertion slot 2010. When bills are inserted in the bill insertion slot 2010, bill detecting signal is output to the CPU 2050 through the bill sensor 2066.
  • When the 1-BET button 2011 is pressed, one bet is conducted each time the 1-BET button 2011 is pressed. A 1-BET switch 2058 is connected to the 1-BET button 2011.
  • The spin button 2012 is operated when the game is started by a current bet number or a previous bet number. When the spin button is pressed, variable display of the symbol rows is started on each reel display part. A spin switch 2057 is connected to the spin button 2012.
  • The 3-BET button 2013, the 5-BET button 2014 and the 8-BET button 2015 are the buttons to be pressed when three credits, five credits and eight credits are betted. A 3-BET switch 2059, a 5-BET switch 2060 and a 8-BET switch 2061 are connected to the 3-BET button 2013, the 5-BET button 2014 and the 8-BET button 2015 respectively.
  • A coin detecting portion 2073 constructed from sensors and the like is arranged inside the coin payout slot 2016. The coin detecting portion 2073 detects number of coins paid out from the coin payout slot 2016.
  • Next, the configuration of a control system of the slot machine 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a block diagram schematically showing the control system of the slot machine.
  • As shown in FIG. 92, the CPU 2050 is configured as a core of the slot machine 2100. A ROM 2051 and a RAM 2052 are connected to the CPU 2050. Various programs and data tables and the like which are necessary in the control of slot machine 2100 are stored in the ROM 2051. For example, various control programs and data tables and the like are stored in the ROM 2051, wherein various control programs include main process programs and the like to be described later, data tables include a lottery table to determine the stop display symbols of the game by lottery and the like. The RAM 2052 is a memory to temporarily store various data calculated by the CPU 2050.
  • A clock pulse generation circuit 2053, a frequency divider 2054, a random number generation circuit 2055 and a random number sampling circuit 2056 are connected to the CPU 2050. The clock pulse generation circuit 2053 is used to generate a basic clock pulse, and the random number generation circuit 2055 is used to generate random numbers. The random numbers sampled through the random number sampling circuit 2056 is used in the various lotteries of the winning combinations and the like.
  • Each switch provided in each button of the operation table 2005 is connected to the CPU 2050 respectively. That is, the spin switch 2057, the 1-BET switch 2058, the 3-BET switch 2059, the 5-BET switch 2060, the 8-BET switch 2061, the exchange switch 2062, the payback switch 2063, the help switch 2064 are connected to the CPU 2050, respectively.
  • When the CPU 2050 receives the switch signal from each switch based on the pressing of each button, the control to conduct various movements corresponding to the button which is connected to the received switch signal is executed by the CPU 2050.
  • The coin sensor 2065 and the bill sensor 2066 are connected to the CPU 2050, respectively. The coin sensor 2065 detects coins which are inserted from the coin insertion slot 2009. As a result, the CPU 2050 calculates the number of inserted coins based on the coin detecting signal output from the coin sensor 2065. The bill sensor 2066 detects the type and the amount of the bills which are inserted from the bill insertion slot 2010, and outputs a bill detecting signal. And the CPU 2050 may calculate an equivalent number of coins to the amount of bills based on the bill detecting signal.
  • A hopper 2071 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a hopper driving circuit 2070. When a driving signal is output from the CPU 2050 to the hopper driving circuit 2070, the hopper 2071 payouts a predetermined number of coins from the coin payout slot 2016.
  • A coin detecting portion 2073 located inside the coin payout slot 2016, is connected to the CPU 2050 via a payout completion signal circuit 2072. When the coin detecting portion 2073 detects that a predetermined number of coins are paid out from the coin payout slot 2016, a coin payout detecting signal is output to the payout completion signal circuit 2072. The payout completion signal circuit 2072 outputs a payout completion signal to the CPU 2050 based on the coin payout detecting signal.
  • The upper display 2003 and the main display 2004 are connected to the CPU 2050 via a liquid crystal driving circuit 2074. As a result, display modes of the upper display 2003 and the main display 2004 are controlled by the CPU 2050, respectively.
  • A touch panel 2201 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a touch panel driving circuit 2202. The touch panel 2201 is provided on the screen of the main display 2004 as described above. The CPU 2050 may determine where the player has touched by referring to the coordinate position information of the part that the player touches, via the touch panel driving circuit 2202. That is, the CPU 2050 can determine the operation mode of the touch panel 2201.
  • A LED 2078 is connected to the CPU 2050 via a LED driving circuit 2077. The LED 2078 is arranged at the light emitting device 2300. The LED 2078 is lighting controlled by the LED driving circuit 2077. In other words, the lighting mode of the decoration parts 2020, 2021, 2022 is controlled by the LED driving circuit 2077.
  • A sound output circuit 2079 and a speaker 2080 are connected to the CPU 2050. The speaker 2080 generates various sound effect based on the output signal from the sound output circuit 2079 when various performances are conducted.
  • Next, the internal configuration of the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 shows an external view of the slot machine 2100 when the front door 2024 is in an open state.
  • Here, for the convenience in description, a part of elements among the elements inside the cabinet in FIG. 93 will be omitted.
  • As shown in FIG. 93, the hopper 2071 and a control box 2500 are arranged inside the cabinet 2002. Here, in FIG. 93, the elements to connect the hopper 2071 and the coin detecting slot 2016 is omitted.
  • The control box 2500 contains the CPU 2050, the ROM 2051, the RAM 2052 and various driving circuit and the like. An arrangement position of the control box 2500 is arbitrary, and may be determined with consideration of heat and/or noise.
  • As shown in FIG. 93, the optical cable 2090 and cable storage parts 2025, 2026 and 2027 are provided inside the cabinet 2002. When the front door 2024 is closed, cable storage parts 2025, 2026 and 2027 are facing to the decoration part 2020, 2021 and 2022, respectively. In each cable storage part 2025, 2026 and 2027, one end of the optical cable 2090 is stored. The light received on the other end of the optical cable 2090 is transmitted to the end of the optical cable 2090 which is stored in the cable storage part 2025, 2026 and 2027, and the transmitted light is diffused by the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022.
  • Here, coins, bills or electronic value (credits) which are equivalent to coins or bills are used as the gaming media in the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment. However, the gaming media applicable in the disclosure are not limited to coins, bills or electronic value. For example, the gaming media may also be medals, tokens, electric moneys, and tickets.
  • Next, the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2300 according to the embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2300. FIG. 94 is a view seen from a X direction of FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 94, plural LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2300. A LED driving circuit 2077 is connected to each LED 2078 respectively. Here, a light emitter other than the LED (for example, light bulbs and the like) may be arranged inside the light emitting device 2300. In other words, the LED in the embodiment is merely one example of the light emitter according to the disclosure.
  • Also, the light emitting device 2300 may be sized down by arranging the LED driving circuit 2077 inside the cabinet 2002. Since the length of the cable between the LED driving circuit 2077 and the light emitting device 2300 is shorten by placing the LED driving circuit 2077 close to the light emitting device 2300, it is preferred in the countermeasure of noise.
  • Convex lenses 2091 corresponding to the LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2300. Also, plural optical cables 2090 each correspond to each convex lens 2091 are provided. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 2078 is condensed at each convex lens 2091, and is received at one end of the optical cable 2090.
  • FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2300 and the cabinet 2002. FIG. 95 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 95, a LED driving circuit 2077 is arranged inside the cabinet 2002. One end of each optical cable 2090 is stored in the cable storage part 2025, 2026 and 2027. As a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 2078 inside the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted to the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022.
  • Next, the transmission of the light emitted from the LED 2078 will be described. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the light emitted from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022. The light emitted from the LED 2078 is condensed at convex lens 2091, and the condensed light is received at one end of the optical cable 2090. And, the light is transmitted in the optical cable 2090, from one end to the other end. And, the light emitted from the other end is irradiated toward the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022, and then the light is diffused by the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022.
  • Also, since the light emitting mode of the LED 2078 is determined by the LED driving circuit 2077, effects in which each decoration part is lighted at a predetermined timing in the game may be conducted.
  • In the third embodiment as described above, the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 of the slot machine 2100. The decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside thereof. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2100. Also, the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2300 is transmitted. The light emitting device 2300 is arranged on the side surface of the cabinet 2002 in the slot machine 2100. Further, the light emitted inside the light emitting device 2300 is transmitted by the optical cable 2090.
  • The convex lens 2091 may be omitted by providing the LED 2078 close to the one end of the optical cable 2090 inside the light emitting device 2300. Also, the convex lens 2091 may be omitted by increasing the directional quality of the LED 2078.
  • According to above configuration, since the LEDs 2078 are arranged outside the cabinet 2002, the exchange of the LED 2078 may be easily conducted. And, the game in the slot machine 2100 may be executed even when the exchange of the LED 2078 is conducted. This is very favorable in the case where the slot machine 2100 according to the embodiment is provided in the environment in which the slot machine 2100 is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the LEDs 2078 will not influence the elements inside the cabinet 2002. And, since the light emitted from the LED 2078 is transmitted by the optical cable 2090, the transmission efficiency of the light is high.
  • [Variant of Third Embodiment]
  • Next, the other embodiment embodying a disclosure as a slot machine will be described.
  • FIG. 97 shows a condition where the front door 2024 of the slot machine according to the embodiment is opened. Here, the same number as that used in the slot machine 2100 of the third embodiment indicates the same or corresponding part in the construction of the slot machine 2100 according to the above third embodiment.
  • As shown in FIG. 97, a slot machine 2101 according to the embodiment does not include an optical cable and a cable storage part. In the slot machine 2101 according to the embodiment, reflecting plates 2092 are arranged in predetermined positions inside the cabinet 2002 and light emitting device 2301.
  • Here, since the control system of the slot machine 2101 is the same as that of the slot machine 2100 according to the third embodiment, description on the control system will be omitted.
  • Next, an internal configuration of the light emitting device 2301 will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing the internal configuration of the light emitting device 2301. FIG. 98 is a view seen from a X direction in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. 98, plural LEDs 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2301. A LED driving circuit 2077 is connected to each LED 2078, respectively. Further, a light emitter other than the LED (for example, light bulbs and the like) may be arranged inside the light emitting device 2301. In other words, the LED in this embodiment is merely one example of the light emitter according to the disclosure. The transmission efficiency of the light emitted from the LED 2078 may be increased by strengthening the directional quality of the LED 2078.
  • Reflecting plates 2092 each corresponds to each LED 2078 are arranged inside the light emitting device 2301, respectively. Each of reflecting plates 2092 is provided with a predetermined angle inside the light emitting device 2301. That is, each reflecting plate 2092 is arranged in a necessary angle to transmit the incident light so as to any of the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022.
  • FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2020. Also, FIG. 99 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97.
  • As shown in FIG. 99, the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301, and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002. The light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002, and is transmitted to the decoration part 2020.
  • FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram showing a condition where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2021. Also, FIG. 100 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97.
  • As shown in FIG. 100, the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301, and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002. The light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002, and is transmitted to the decoration part 2021.
  • FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are schematic diagrams showing conditions where the emitted light from the LED 2078 is transmitted to the decoration part 2022. Also, FIG. 102 is a view seen from a Y direction in FIG. 97.
  • As shown in FIG. 101 and FIG. 102, the light emitted from the LED 2078 inside the light emitting device 2301 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the light emitting device 2301, and is transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002. The light transmitted to the interior of the cabinet 2002 is reflected at the reflecting plate 2092 provided inside the cabinet 2002, and is transmitted to the decoration part 2022.
  • In the variant of third embodiment as described above, the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are arranged around the main display 2004 of the slot machine 2101. The decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 diffuse the light irradiated from the backside. As a result, it looks like as if the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 are emitting light when they are seen from the front side of the slot machine 2101. Also, the light irradiated to the backside of the decoration parts 2020, 2021 and 2022 is that light emitted inside an emitting device 2301 is transmitted. The light emitting device 2301 is arranged on the side surface of the cabinet 2002 in the slot machine 2101. Further, the light emitted inside the light emitting device 2301 is transmitted by the reflecting plate 2092.
  • According to above configuration, since the LED 2078 is arranged outside the cabinet 2002, the exchange of the LED 2078 may be easily conducted. And the game in the slot machine 2101 may be executed even when the exchange of the LED 2078 is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the slot machine 2101 according to the embodiment is provided in the environment where the slot machine 2101 is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the LED 2078 will not influence the elements inside the cabinet 2002. Further, since the light is transmitted through the reflecting plate, there is no need to wire inside the main body.
  • Here, aspects of the disclosure are not limited to the above embodiments and various changes and modification can be done within the scope of the disclosure. For example, the optical cable 2090 and the reflecting plate 2092 may be used in combination.
  • Also, the disclosure may also be applied to various card gaming machines and roulette machines.
  • The disclosure directed to the third embodiment is applicable to the slot machines directed to the first and second embodiments. More specifically, the slot machines as described in the first and second embodiments may be configured to include a main body having a decoration part and a light emitting device arranged outside the main body. Further, light emitted from the replaceable light emitter is transmitted to the decoration part. Further, the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment comprises a main body having a decoration part and a light emitting device arranged outside the main body. Also, the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter. Also, light emitted from the replaceable light emitter is transmitted to the decoration part. Also, the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • As a result, since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment comprises a main body having a decoration part, a light emitting device arranged outside the main body, and an optical cable. Also, the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter and a lens condensing light emitted from the light emitter. Also, the optical cable transmits the condensed light to the decoration part. Also, the decoration part diffuses the transmitted light.
  • As a result, since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise. Further, since the light emitted from the light emitter is transmitted by the optical cable, transmission efficiency of the light is high.
  • It is preferable that a gaming machine according to one or more aspects of the disclosure directed to the third embodiment comprises a main body having a decoration part, a light emitting device arranged outside the main body, and a reflecting plate. Also, the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter. Also, the reflecting plate reflects light emitted from the replaceable light emitter. Also, light reflected by the reflecting plate is transmitted to the decoration part. Also, the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
  • As a result, since the light emitter is arranged outside the main body, the exchange of light emitter will be easily conducted. And, the game in the gaming machine may be executed even when the exchange of the light emitter is conducted. This is very favorable in the case that the gaming machine is provided in the environment where the gaming machine is kept on working for 24 hours (for example, a casino). Further, the heat generated by the light emitter will not influence the elements inside the main body. Further, since the cable length from the power source device, the control board or the like may be shortened, it is advantageous in the countermeasure of noise. Further, since the light is transmitted through the reflecting plate, there is no need to wire inside the main body.
  • Although the subject matter has been described in language specific to structural features and/or methodological acts, it is to be understood that the subject matter defined in the appended claims is not necessarily limited to the specific features or acts described above. Rather, the specific features and acts described above are disclosed as example forms of implementing the claims.

Claims (5)

1. A slot machine comprising:
a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and
a processor executing processes of:
(a) repositioning symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas;
(b) executing a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game;
(c) designating one or more specific symbol display area(s) from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game;
(d) placing, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state; and
(e) repositioning symbols not placed in the hold state and awarding a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
2. A slot machine comprising:
a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and
a processor executing processes of:
(a) repositioning symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas;
(b) executing a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game;
(c) designating one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas during a free game;
(d) placing, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state; and
(e) repositioning symbols not placed in the hold state and awarding a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
3. A slot machine comprising:
a display including a plurality of symbol display areas for displaying symbols; and
a processor executing processes of:
(a) repositioning symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas;
(b) executing a free game in case a predetermined condition is satisfied during a base game;
(c) designating one or more specific symbol display area(s) randomly selected from among the plurality of symbol display areas every game or every plurality of games in a free game;
(d) placing, in case specific symbol(s) is(are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during a free game, the specific symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display areas in a hold state; and
(e) repositioning symbols not placed in the hold state and awarding a prize based on a symbol combination consisting of the specific symbol(s) placed in the hold state at the process (d) and symbols currently repositioned.
4. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein,
in case wild symbol(s) is (are) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol display area(s) during the free game, the processor places the wild symbol(s) repositioned in the one or more specific symbol area(s) in the hold state.
5. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising
a main body having a decoration part; and
a light emitting device arranged outside the main body;
wherein
the light emitting device has a replaceable light emitter;
light emitted from the replaceable light emitter is transmitted to the decoration part; and
the decoration part diffuses the light transmitted thereto.
US12/540,787 2008-08-20 2009-08-13 Slot Machine Abandoned US20100048287A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/540,787 US20100048287A1 (en) 2008-08-20 2009-08-13 Slot Machine

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US9032408P 2008-08-20 2008-08-20
US12/540,787 US20100048287A1 (en) 2008-08-20 2009-08-13 Slot Machine

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20100048287A1 true US20100048287A1 (en) 2010-02-25

Family

ID=41696891

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/540,787 Abandoned US20100048287A1 (en) 2008-08-20 2009-08-13 Slot Machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (1) US20100048287A1 (en)

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120040734A1 (en) * 2010-08-13 2012-02-16 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
JP2012179354A (en) * 2011-02-28 2012-09-20 Konami Gaming Inc Game machine, and computer program
US8734225B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2014-05-27 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
US20140162751A1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-12 Cadillac Jack Electronic gaming system with additional gaming functionality
USD740309S1 (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-10-06 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface and icons
US20170116821A1 (en) * 2001-11-06 2017-04-27 Igt Electronic game and method for playing a game based upon symbols in a game matrix
USD785654S1 (en) * 2015-04-24 2017-05-02 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen with graphical user interface
USD785653S1 (en) * 2015-02-27 2017-05-02 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
USD786902S1 (en) * 2014-11-25 2017-05-16 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
US10546466B2 (en) 2012-12-24 2020-01-28 Konami Gaming, Inc. Gaming machine and methods of allowing a player to play gaming machines having expanding symbol positions
US11138825B2 (en) * 2020-02-24 2021-10-05 Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic gaming with trigger conditions

Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6093102A (en) * 1994-09-15 2000-07-25 Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd Multiline gaming machine
US6394902B1 (en) * 2001-04-18 2002-05-28 Igt Gaming device having different sets of primary and secondary reel symbols
US7056213B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2006-06-06 Igt Gaming device having a probability enhancing trigger symbol
US20060264255A1 (en) * 2005-05-17 2006-11-23 Milo Borissov Game played with playing card and non-playing card symbols
US20070178964A1 (en) * 2006-01-30 2007-08-02 Ghaly Nabil N Method & apparatus for a gaming device
US20070254735A1 (en) * 2002-05-15 2007-11-01 Marks Daniel M Method of playing a slot machine ("Re-Spin & Re-Pay")
US20080064481A1 (en) * 2006-09-01 2008-03-13 Jackson Robert J Gaming apparatus and method with dependent feature game
US20080113742A1 (en) * 2006-11-13 2008-05-15 William George Amos Game of chance with wild elements and a method and system for providing thereof
US20090170590A1 (en) * 2005-06-29 2009-07-02 Alfred Thomas Wagering Game With Enhanced Cascading Reel Symbol Feature
US7666083B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-02-23 Igt Gaming device having a free spin game including an accumulated modifier
US7682246B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-03-23 Igt Gaming device and method having free activation mode and free activation mode with free activation retrigger
US7690987B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-04-06 Igt Gaming device having a free spin game
US7850519B2 (en) * 2002-10-09 2010-12-14 Konami Gaming Incorporated Game machine
US7862421B2 (en) * 2004-12-06 2011-01-04 Igt Gaming device and method having increasing payline wager amounts

Patent Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6093102A (en) * 1994-09-15 2000-07-25 Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd Multiline gaming machine
US6394902B1 (en) * 2001-04-18 2002-05-28 Igt Gaming device having different sets of primary and secondary reel symbols
US20070254735A1 (en) * 2002-05-15 2007-11-01 Marks Daniel M Method of playing a slot machine ("Re-Spin & Re-Pay")
US7682246B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-03-23 Igt Gaming device and method having free activation mode and free activation mode with free activation retrigger
US7056213B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2006-06-06 Igt Gaming device having a probability enhancing trigger symbol
US7775874B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-08-17 Igt Gaming device having a probability enhancing trigger symbol
US7690987B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-04-06 Igt Gaming device having a free spin game
US7666083B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2010-02-23 Igt Gaming device having a free spin game including an accumulated modifier
US7850519B2 (en) * 2002-10-09 2010-12-14 Konami Gaming Incorporated Game machine
US7862421B2 (en) * 2004-12-06 2011-01-04 Igt Gaming device and method having increasing payline wager amounts
US20060264255A1 (en) * 2005-05-17 2006-11-23 Milo Borissov Game played with playing card and non-playing card symbols
US20090170590A1 (en) * 2005-06-29 2009-07-02 Alfred Thomas Wagering Game With Enhanced Cascading Reel Symbol Feature
US20070178964A1 (en) * 2006-01-30 2007-08-02 Ghaly Nabil N Method & apparatus for a gaming device
US20080064481A1 (en) * 2006-09-01 2008-03-13 Jackson Robert J Gaming apparatus and method with dependent feature game
US20080113742A1 (en) * 2006-11-13 2008-05-15 William George Amos Game of chance with wild elements and a method and system for providing thereof

Cited By (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10417870B2 (en) * 2001-11-06 2019-09-17 Igt Electronic game and method for playing a game based upon symbols in a game matrix
US20170116821A1 (en) * 2001-11-06 2017-04-27 Igt Electronic game and method for playing a game based upon symbols in a game matrix
US20120040734A1 (en) * 2010-08-13 2012-02-16 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
US8734225B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2014-05-27 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
US9142100B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2015-09-22 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
US8485885B2 (en) * 2010-08-13 2013-07-16 Konami Gaming, Inc. Video slot gaming machine
JP2012179354A (en) * 2011-02-28 2012-09-20 Konami Gaming Inc Game machine, and computer program
US20140162751A1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-12 Cadillac Jack Electronic gaming system with additional gaming functionality
US9564006B2 (en) * 2012-12-12 2017-02-07 Cadillac Jack, Inc. Slot machine with secondary game featuring replacement symbols
US10546466B2 (en) 2012-12-24 2020-01-28 Konami Gaming, Inc. Gaming machine and methods of allowing a player to play gaming machines having expanding symbol positions
US11468745B2 (en) 2012-12-24 2022-10-11 Konami Gaming, Inc. Gaming machine and methods of allowing a player to play gaming machines having expanding symbol positions
USD740309S1 (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-10-06 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface and icons
USD786902S1 (en) * 2014-11-25 2017-05-16 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
USD785653S1 (en) * 2015-02-27 2017-05-02 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface
USD785654S1 (en) * 2015-04-24 2017-05-02 Net Entertainment Malta Services, Ltd. Display screen with graphical user interface
US11887430B2 (en) * 2020-02-24 2024-01-30 Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic gaming with trigger conditions
US11138825B2 (en) * 2020-02-24 2021-10-05 Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic gaming with trigger conditions
US20220005313A1 (en) * 2020-02-24 2022-01-06 Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic gaming with trigger conditions
US11600136B2 (en) * 2020-02-24 2023-03-07 Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for electronic gaming with trigger conditions

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20100048287A1 (en) Slot Machine
US9047740B2 (en) Wagering game, reel-based gaming machine and method with anticipation lighting
US20090275387A1 (en) Solt Machine
US8998699B2 (en) Slot machine
US20090233682A1 (en) Gaming machine
US20120115569A1 (en) Gaming machine capable of broadcasting a status of a game by a reel action
US20090061985A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20090104971A1 (en) Slot Machine
US8721423B2 (en) Slot machine having bonus mode using alternate reels with increased win probability
US8777721B2 (en) Slot machine using marker that adds bonus trigger functionality to reel symbols
US20120115568A1 (en) Gaming machine capable of broadcasting a status of a game by a reel action
US20090156291A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20080139293A1 (en) Gaming machine
US20090029762A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20090098929A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20090111570A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20090156300A1 (en) Gaming Machine
US20090143132A1 (en) Gaming machine awarding prize based on number of special symbol and playing method thereof
JP2009247359A (en) Game machine
US8118661B2 (en) Gaming machine
JP2009005886A (en) Game machine
US8075381B2 (en) Gaming machine
US20090275388A1 (en) Slot Machine
JP2007289484A (en) Game machine
JP2007054317A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ARUZE CORP.,JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:YOSHIZAWA, KAZUMASA;KONNO, YUYA;REEL/FRAME:023098/0211

Effective date: 20090723

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION